hcna uc ihuca v2.8 material

805

Upload: sheik8o

Post on 07-Jul-2018

279 views

Category:

Documents


6 download

TRANSCRIPT

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 1/803

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 2/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 3/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 4/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 5/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 6/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 7/803

PBX: Private Branch Exchange

Subscriber Card: Provides interfaces for connecting the internal phones.

Trunk Card: Provides the interface to connect the telephone company or other PBX.

Switched Network: It’s to connect an incoming call to an outgoing one.

Signaling Processor: Used to receive and send signaling information.

Control System: It’s the heart of the PBX, all control actions needed to set up/tear down a

connection are executed by the system.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 8/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 9/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 10/803

When you speak into an analog phone, the sound signals are converted into electrical

signal. The volume and pitch that you use when speaking result in different variations of

electrical current. Electrical voltage, frequency, current, and charge are all used in some

combination to represent the properties of your voice.

Analog phone lines use the properties of electricity to convey changes in voice over

cabling. Of course, the process of sending the audio over phone lines is more complexity

than simply sending audio signals. Additionally, The analog phones you use at home must

carry many different types of signaling, too. Signaling may include messages such as dial

tone, dialed digits, busy signals, and so on. These signaling types are discussed later in this

chapter.

For now, analog cabling connectivity operation is summarized as following:

Each analog circuit is composed of a pair of wires. One wire is the ground, or

positive side of the connection (often called the tip). The other wire is the battery, or

negative side of the connection (often called the ring). You’ll commonly hear phone

technicians talk about these wires as the “tip and ring.” These two wires are what

power the analog phone and allow it to function.

When the phone is lifted off hook, the phone connects the two wires, causing an

electrical signal (48V DC voltage) to flow from the phone company central office

(CO) into the phone. This is known as loop start signaling.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 11/803

Analog signaling was a massive improvement compared to tin cans and string, but they

have their problems. First, an analog electrical signal experience degradation (signal

fading) over long distances. To increase the distance that the analog signal could travel,

the phone company had to install repeaters to regenerate the signal as it becomes weak.

Unfortunately, as the analog signal was regenerated, the repeater device was unable to

differentiate between the voice traveling over the wire and line noise. Each time the

repeater regenerates the voice, it also amplifies the line noise. Thus, the more times a

phone company regenerated a signal, the more distorted and difficult to understand the

signal became.

The second difficulty encountered with analog connections was the sheer number of wiresthe phone company had to run to support a large geographical area or a business with a

large number of phones. Because each phone required two wires, the bundles of wire

became massive and difficult to maintain (imagine the hassle of a single pair of wires in the

bundle breaking). A solution to send multiple calls over a single wire was needed. A digital

connection is that solution.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 12/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 13/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 14/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 15/803

Line signaling is responsible for off-hook, ringing signal, answer, ground start, on-hook

unidirectional supervision messaging in each direction from calling party to called party

and vice versa.

Ground start signaling originated from its implementation in so called: pay phone systems.

Many years ago, when a person lifted the handset of a pay phone, he did not receive a

dial tone until he dropped in a coin. The coin would brush past the tip and ring wires and

temporarily ground them. The grounding of the wires signaled the phone company to

send a dial tone on the line.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 16/803

Loop start signaling is the typical signaling type used in home environments. Loop start

signaling is susceptible to a problem known as glare. Glare occurs when the subscriber

picks up the phone to make an outgoing call at the same time as another call comes in on

the phone line before the phone has a chance dial.

Many other types of signaling exist in the analog world. These include supervisory

signaling (on hook, off hook, ringing), informational signaling (dial tone, busy, ring back,

and so on), and address signaling (dual-tone multi-frequency (DTMF) and Pulse).

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 17/803

Channel-associated signaling, also known as PTS(Per-Trunk Signaling ), is a form of digital

communication signaling.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 18/803

R2 signaling is a CAS system developed in the 1960s that is still in use today in Europe,

Latin America, Australia, and Asia.

Line signaling is used for supervisory signals for call setup and teardown.

Line signaling have 3 types: 

R2-Digital

R2-Analog

R2-Pulse

Inter-register signaling is used for address, priority levels, congestion notification, or

charges messaging.

Inter-register signaling uses multifrequency tones in the timeslot used for the call so that it

is in-band signaling.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 19/803

CCS(Common Channel Signaling),in the US also common-channel interoffice signaling

(CCIS)

PRA: Primary Rate Adapter

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 20/803

A signaling point code (SPC) identifies the address information of a signaling point (SP) or

a signaling transfer point (STP) in a Signaling System Number 7 (SS7) network.

An SPC specifies the source and destination of an SS7 signaling message so that node in

the signaling network can send, forward, or receive signaling messages correctly.

There are three types signal nodes as followings:

Signaling Point (SP). A node that sends or receives signaling messages in a signaling

network.

Service Switching Point (SSP). The telephone exchange that initially responds, when

a telephone caller dials a number, by sending a query to a central database called a

service control point (SCP) so that the call can be handled. SSP uses the SS7

protocols which are responsible for the call setup, management, and termination

with other service switching points.

Service Control Point (SCP): The standard component of the Intelligent Network (IN)

telephone system which is used to control the service. SCPs are connected with

either SSPs or STPs.

Signaling Transfer Point (STP): A node that transfers messages received from a

signaling link to another. Element of an SS7-based Intelligent Network that performsrouting of the SS7 signaling.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 21/803

PRA(Primary Rate Access)Signaling: also called PRI(Primary Rate Interface) signaling or

DSS1(Digital Subscriber Signaling System No.1) signaling, is an interface of ISDN(Integrated

Services Digital Network).

PRI corresponds to two primary rates: 1.544 Mbps (T1) and 2.048 Mbps (E1);

PRI operate in a master-slave mode (or network-user mode). You must decide which

device will be the network side and the other device will be user side.

B-channel: Bearer-channel

D-channel: Data-channel

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 22/803

The Primary Rate Access (PRA) protocol is one of the interface protocols defined by the

Digital Subscriber Signaling No.1 (DSS1) signaling system. The DSS1 signaling system is a

group of interface protocols between ISDN users and networks. It consists of the physical

layer, data link layer, and network layer, corresponding to the three bottom layers of the

OSI system.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 23/803

Message List

SETUP: The message is sent by the calling party to the network and by the networkto the called party to establish the call.

ALERTING: The message is sent by the called party to the network and by the

network to the caller to indicate that called alerting has been initiated.

CALL PROCEEDING: The message is sent by the called party to the network or by the

network to the calling party to indicate that requested call establishment has been

initiated and no more call establishment information will be accepted.

CONNECT: The message is sent by the called party) to the network and by the

network to the calling party to indicate call acceptance by the called party.

CONNECT ACKNOWLEDGE: The message is sent by the network to the called party

to indicate the user has been awarded the call. It may also be sent by the calling

party to the network to allow symmetrical call control procedures.

DISCONNECT: The message is sent by the user to request the network to clear an

end-to-end connection or is sent by the network to indicate that the end-to-end

connection is cleared.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 24/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 25/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 26/803

Document fax machine can be divided into the following categories according to the

different transmission speed and modulation mode:

Double-sideband modulation technology, transmission speed for each page (16) is

about 6 minutes, known as the first machine;

The bandwidth compression technology, transmission speed for per page is about 3

minutes, known as the second machine;

Less source redundancy digital processing technology, transmission speed for per

page is about 1 minute, referred to as the third machine;

The fax machine that can combine with the computer, store information and near

real-time transmission speed, classified as fourth machine.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 27/803

The most common example is a voice band modem that turns the digital data of a

personal computer into modulated electrical signals in the voice frequency range of a

telephone channel. These signals can be transmitted over telephone lines and

demodulated by another modem at the receiver side to recover the digital data.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 28/803

1. AB;

2. ACD.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 29/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 30/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 31/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 32/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 33/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 34/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 35/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 36/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 37/803

VoIP: Voice over Internet Protocol, A value-added service technology for IP calls. The VoIP

service is a new IP telecom service. It can run on fixed and mobile networks and support

flexible access points. Fees for VoIP subscribers are relatively low. Calls between VoIP

subscribers who belong to the same carrier are free of charge.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 38/803

Toll-bypass: Long distance voice calls across the WAN instead of the PSTN enables you to

reduce the overall telephony expenditure.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 39/803

An analog or analogue signal is any continuous signal for which the time varying feature

(variable) of the signal is a representation of some other time varying quantity.

A digital signal is a physical signal that is a representation of a sequence of discrete values

(a quantified discrete-time signal).

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 40/803

Sampling is the conversion of a continuous analogue signal to a discrete signal. A common

example is the conversion of a sound wave (a continuous signal) into a sequence of

samples (a discrete-time signal).

Quantization is the process of converting each analog sample value into a discrete value

that can be assigned a unique digital code word.

Coding is the process by which information from a source is converted into symbols to be

communicated.

Decoding is the reverse process, converting these code symbols back into information

understandable by a receiver.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 41/803

The requirement of voice compression:

Code rate fits with the common voice channel transmission, generally the coding

rate is within 16-2 KB/s. Under a certain code rate, voice quality should be as high as possible.

Decoding time delay is small, the total delay is generally not more than 65 ms.

Decoding algorithm complexity cannot be too big to suitable for large scaleintegrated circuit implementation.

Better toughness and better anti-error rate performance.

The advantages of speech coding

Improve the quality of calls (digital + channel coding error correction)

Improve the spectrum utilization efficiency (low bit rate coding)

Improve the system capacity (low bit rate, voice activation technology)

Speech coding classification:

Waveform coding

Transform the time domain analog voice waveform signal into digital voicesignals after sampling, quantization and coding.

Parametric coding (source code) 

Based on the mechanism of human language pronunciation, find and code thespeech characteristic parameters

Hybrid coding

Hybrid coding combines the advantages of waveform coding and parametriccoding.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 42/803

Common voice codec technology contain:

PCM(Pulse Code Modulation):Pulse Code Modulation; the PSTN classic voice

encoding; is the standard measure of voice quality; 8K sampling bandwidth of 64K;

ADPCM(Adaptive Differential Pulse Code Modulation):adaptive differential coding

methods; usually applied to the limited bandwidth; voice quality is very close to the

PCM, FAX can be supported under certain restrictions, a bandwidth of 32Kbps;

CELP(Code Excited Linear Predictor)

LD-CELP(Low-Delay Code Excited Linear Predictor):low-delay Code Excited Linear

Predictive Coding approach; is often said that G728; voice quality and ADPCM issimilar or even better; bandwidth of 16Kbps; does not support FAX and the modem;

625us one, you need 10-bit information (codebook index value);

CS-ACELP(Conjugate Structure Algebraic Code Excited Linear Predictor):Conjugate

structure generation digital linear predictive coding; is our most popular G729; close

of ADPCM voice quality; bandwidth of 8 Kbps, a 10ms per frame is 10 bytes;

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 43/803

G.729

Commonly used include the following criteria: G729, G729A, G729B;

G729 is 8kbps a low-rate codec

G729A is an appendix of G729, G729 complexity of the algorithm can be

simplified.

G729B is a supplement for the G729 silence detection technology.

G729 the number of frames, each frame length is 10ms, TMG is the default

support 20ms, 30ms, 160ms; TMG VSU modify the code, can support 10ms,

each package contains a.

G729 payload length, each frame is 10 bytes = 8kbps * 10ms / 8

Long when the recommended package, 20ms, bandwidth 34.4kbps (not using silence

detection technology).

Commonly G729A 8kbps at 20ms package.

The RTP payload type value is 18.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 44/803

Packet voice needs intensive operations (to complete a large amount of computational

processing operations in a short period of time) and special treatment. The general

microprocessor is not competent for these operations.

DSP is used in voice compression, voice activation detection, echo cancellation, delay

treatment and clock synchronization.

Usually a DSP can support multiple voice channel. Number of voice channel depends on

many factors, one of the main factor is the DSP chip can handle how many MIPS (MIPS,

millions of instructions per second). Another key factor is the memory in DSP. The more

memory, the higher operation efficiency, but the increasing of the on-chip memory can

reduce MIPS values. Therefore, the balance between memory and the MIPS must beconsidered. In general, the manufacturer will configure large memory to achieve support

from 1 to 8 port (interface).

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 45/803

IP phones use the digitalized transmission technology in packets based on the IP

technology. The basic principles are as follows:

Compress and encode voice data according to the voice compression algorithm.

Package the voice data based on a certain protocol such as the IP protocol.

Send data packets to the recipient through the IP network.

Decode and decompress voice packets after collecting the voice packets to restore

the voice packets to the original voice signals.

The feature of IP phone: 

Rapid deployment, unified management.

High-quality voice.

Provides various business functions.

Simple and Intuitive Operation.

A Full Range of Mobile office

Meet the individual needs of staffs.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 46/803

IP PBX integrates voice communication into enterprise data network through the VoIP

technology, thereby be able to set up a unified voice and data network for connecting

offices all over the world.

IP PBX integrates the call control, media gateway, access control, resource allocation,

protocol processing, routing, authentication, billing function etc.

It can be deployed on a hybrid network with IP phones, remote analog phones, and soft

phones, providing high-quality voice and value-added services for enterprises customers,

such as government departments, electric power companies, and financial companies.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 47/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 48/803

Traditional PBX (TDM PBX)

TDM PBX was commonly used for cost saving internal calls before pure IP PBX andhybrid IP PBX. Capacity is ranging from dozens of lines to thousands of lines to

access analog users by subscriber board. When more users, user accessing can take

up a very large equipment room space.

TDM PBX only provides basic voice business functions, and can not provide video

and all kinds of business services based on IP, which is used in some enterprise that

business requirements are not very high. Traditional PBX uses the special technique,

lacks of openness and standard, expand business difficulty.

IP PBX

The call server, media gateway, signaling gateway, relay gateway, terminals and

others are independent, communication between them through TCP/IP, to provide

users with VoIP business, pure IP PBX call server based on PC server platform (such

as IBM, DELL server), using the Windows or Linux operating system.

Business functions mainly through IP phone, IAD and other access devices to provide

users with voice in LAN, the network is flexible, expandable, but the stability of the

pure IP PBX based on server architecture may not meet specified requirements, tend

to produce puzzling collapse problem, the solution to this problem is commonly to

use two pure IP PBX to work, and improve reliability.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 49/803

The advantages of IP PBX compared to TDM PBX

IP PBX supports remote/centralized configuration management based on IP

network, convenient maintenance, timely grasp the system status and fault

Doesn't need another phone lines, can remote access to the user without regionalrestrictions

Users can use the configured IP telephone or IAD through Ethernet interface in the

office

Can keep their existed phone numbers

Convenient roaming - due to its characteristics of SIP protocol can transfer the

calling to anywhere in the world

Reduces the cost of internal communication because of using the enterprise Intranetor private network

The SIP standard dispense with expensive dedicated telephone

Can enlarge shrinks scale - based on the expansion of software license

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 50/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 51/803

The impact factors from IP Network:

Packet Loss: If you want to get high-quality voice, let packet loss less than 1 percent;

Latency: ITU-T G.114 recommendation specifies that for good voice quality, no more

than 150 ms of one-way, end-to-end delay should occur.

Define:The time takes for speech to exit the speaker's mouth and reach the

listener's ear.

Type

Propagation Delay: The delay used for electrons travel through

copper or fiber from calling party to called party. Handling Delay: Devices that forward the frame through the

network cause handling delay.

Jitter: Jitter is defined as a variation in the delay of received packets.

The impact factors from codec:

Analog to digital conversion

Digital to analog conversion

The voice compression algorithm voice quality reduction

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 52/803

Mean opinion score (MOS) is a method of determining voice quality. Listeners hear a

phrase read over a voice network which uses a special codec and rate the quality of the

audio on a scale of 1 to 5, where 1 is the worst and 5 is the best.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 53/803

Silence Suppression

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 54/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 55/803

In traditional telephony networks, a dedicated bandwidth for each voice stream provides

voice with a guaranteed bandwidth across the network. Because bandwidth is guaranteed

in the time division multiplexing (TDM) environment, there is no variable delay (jitter).

Configuring voice in a data network requires network services with low delay, minimal

 jitter, and minimal packet loss. Bandwidth requirements must be properly calculated based

on the codec that is used and the number of concurrent connections. QoS must be

configured to minimize jitter and loss of voice packets. The PSTN provides 99.999 percent

availability, and to match this high availability of the PSTN, the IP network must be

designed with redundancy and failover mechanisms.

Issue Solution

Packet loss Design the network to minimize congestion

Prioritize voice packets

Use codecs to minimize small amounts of packet loss

Latency Increase bandwidth

Choose a different codec type

Fragment data packets

Prioritize voice packets

Jitter Use jitter buffers

Bandwidth Calculate bandwidth requirements, including voice payload, overhead, and data

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 56/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 57/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 58/803

Flow classification is to classify the packets that enters the DiffServ domain, so that can be

appropriately treated in the network. The main purpose of traffic flow classification is to

let other applications system that handles this message or device know the category of the

message, and to implement some agreed processing based on this category .

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 59/803

Traffic policing is the process of monitoring the network traffic for compliance with a

traffic contract and taking steps to enforce that contract. Traffic sources which are aware

of a traffic contract may apply traffic shaping to ensure their output stays within the

contract and is thus not discarded. Traffic exceeding a traffic contract may be discarded

immediately, marked as non-compliant, or left as-is, depending on administrative policy

and the characteristics of the excess traffic.

The token bucket is an algorithm used in packet switched computer networks and

telecommunications networks to check that data transmissions conform to defined limits

on bandwidth and burstiness (a measure of the unevenness or variations in the traffic

flow).

The token bucket algorithm is based on an analogy of a fixed capacity bucket into which

tokens, normally representing a unit of bytes or a single packet of predetermined size, are

added at a fixed rate. When a packet is to be checked for conformance to the defined

limits, the bucket is inspected to see if it contains sufficient tokens at that time. If so, the

appropriate number of tokens, e.g. equivalent to the length of the packet in bytes, are

removed ("cashed in"), and the packet is passed, e.g., for transmission. If there are

insufficient tokens in the bucket the packet does not conform and the contents of the

bucket are not changed.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 60/803

Traffic shaping (also known as "packet shaping") is a computer network traffic

management technique which delays some or all datagram to bring them into compliance

with a desired traffic profile. Traffic shaping is a form of rate limiting.

Traffic shaping is used to optimize or guarantee performance, improve latency, and/or

increase usable bandwidth for some kinds of packets by delaying other kinds.

A conforming flow can thus contain traffic with an average rate up to the rate at which

tokens are added to the bucket, and have a burstiness determined by the depth of the

bucket. This burstiness may be expressed in terms of either a jitter tolerance, i.e. how

much sooner a packet might conform (e.g. arrive or be transmitted) than would be

expected from the limit on the average rate, or a burst tolerance or maximum burst size,i.e. how much more than the average level of traffic might conform in some finite period.

The token bucket can be used in either traffic shaping or traffic policing. In traffic policing,

nonconforming packets may be discarded (dropped) or may be reduced in priority (for

downstream traffic management functions to drop if there is congestion). In traffic

shaping, packets are delayed until they conform. Traffic policing and traffic shaping are

commonly used to protect the network against excess or excessively bursty traffic.

Traffic shaping is commonly used in the network interfaces in hosts to prevent

transmissions being discarded by traffic management functions in the network.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 61/803

If a new packet comes when packets with a lower priority are being sent, the new packet

will be sent immediately while packets with the lower priority stop to be sent. This enables

the packets related to the core services (such as VoIP) to be handled earlier. The packets

related to ordinary services (such as email) are handled when the core services are all

handled and the network is idle. By doing so, key services are handled earlier and network

resources are also fully used.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 62/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 63/803

1. A;

2. D.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 64/803

3. BD.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 65/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 66/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 67/803

MGCP: Media Gateway Control Protocol

MEGACO: Media Gateway Control

H.248 protocol was the result of collaboration of the MEGACO working group of the

Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF) and International Telecommunication Union

Telecommunication Study Group 16. We called it H.248 in ITU-T, and called it MEGACO in

IETF.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 68/803

H.323 is a suite of protocols defined by the ITU for multimedia conferences over LANs.

TheH.323 protocol was designed by the ITU-T and initially approved in February 1996. It

was developed as a protocol that provides IP networks with traditional telephony

functionality. Today, H.323 is the most widely deployed standards-based voice and

videoconferencing standard for packet-switched networks.

H.323 is a standard for communication protocols from the International

Telecommunications Union Telecommunication Standardization Sector(ITU-T); Version 4 is

the current version. H.323 was created to provide multimedia communication across a

packet network. The protocol can handle video and data, in addition to audio. H.323

interoperates well with the public switched telephone network (PSTN) in translating

between call setup and control signals used in an IP network and those used in a

switched-circuit network. H.323 is widely used in video conferencing deployments.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 69/803

Notice: Gateway, Gatekeeper and MCU can be in a single device.

The terminals provide the real-time and bi-direction communication in the packet-switchednetworks, and all the terminals compulsory support voice communication and optionally

support video and data applications.

The terminals in H.323 System contains: Telephones, Video phones, Voicemail Systems,

“Soft phones”, (e.g., NetMeeting®).

The gateway is an option component in H.323 system, and it provides the translation

function between different types of voice networks.

Provide interoperability between different telecommunications systems

Gateways are logically two endpoints, one in each telecom domain

Encoding, protocol, and call control mappings occur in the gateways between the

two endpoints

H.323 Proxy: a special “null” gateway, with two H.323 endpoints

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 70/803

The gatekeeper is an optional component, and it provides pre-call and call-level control

services to H.323 endpoints. Gatekeepers are logically separated from the other network

elements in H.323 environments.

The Gatekeeper, which is optional in an H.323 system, provides call control services to the

H.323 endpoints.

Address translation

Admission and access control of endpoints

Bandwidth management

MCU Typically consists of multi-point controller (MC) and multi-point processor (MP)

MC - handles control and signaling for conference support

MP - receives streams from endpoints, processes them, and returns them to the

endpoints in the conference

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 71/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 72/803

The protocols specified by H.323 include the following:

H.225 call signaling: H.225 call signaling is used to establish a connectionbetween two H.323 endpoints. This connection is achieved by exchanging H.225

protocol messages on the call-signaling channel. The call-signaling channel is

opened between two H.323 endpoints or between an endpoint and the gatekeeper.

H.225 Registration, Admission, and Status: Registration, Admission, and Status

(RAS) is the protocol between endpoints (terminals and gateways) and gatekeepers.

The RAS is used to perform registration, admission control, bandwidth changes, and

status and disengage procedures between endpoints and gatekeepers. A RAS

channel is used to exchange RAS messages. This signaling channel is opened

between an endpoint and a gatekeeper prior to the establishment of any other

channels.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 73/803

H.245 control signaling: H.245 control signaling is used to exchange end-to-end

control messages governing the operation of the H.323 endpoint. These control

messages carry information related to the following:

Capabilities exchange

Opening and closing of logical channels used to carry media streams

Flow-control messages

General commands and indications 

 Audio codec: An audio codec encodes the audio signal from the microphone for

transmission on the transmitting H.323 terminal and decodes the received audio

code that is sent to the speaker on the receiving H.323 terminal. Because audio is

the minimum service provided by the H.323 standard, all H.323 terminals must have

at least one audio codec support, as specified in the ITU-T G.711 recommendation

(audio coding at 64 kb/s). Additional audio codec recommendations such as G.722

(64, 56, and 48 kb/s), G.723.1 (5.3 and 6.3 kb/s), G.728 (16 kb/s), and G.729 (8

kb/s) may also be supported.

 Video codec: A video codec encodes video from the camera for transmission on the

transmitting H.323 terminal and decodes the received video code that is sent to the

video display on the receiving H.323 terminal. Because H.323 specifies support of

video as optional, the support of video codec is optional as well. However, any

H.323 terminal providing video communications must support video encoding and

decoding as specified in the ITU-T H.261 recommendation.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 74/803

The flow shows that the call signaling between the two endpoints communicate directly.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 75/803

Many IP applications require an exchange of data between associated participants.

Implementation of these applications is complicated by the practices of participants,

because end users may move between endpoint, may be addressable in multiple ways,

sometimes concurrently, and may communicate over several different media. Many

protocols have been authored to carry various forms of real-time multimedia session data

such as voice, video, or text messages.

SIP is an application layer control protocol used to establish, modify and terminate

multimedia sessions via pre-defined signaling message exchanges. It is independent of

underlying transport protocols and the type of session that is being established. It enables

IP endpoints to discover one another and to agree on a characterization of a session that

they would like to share.

RFC 3261(that obsoletes RFC 2543) defines SIP version 2 as an application layer signaling

protocol that defines initiation, modification and termination of interactive, multimedia

communication sessions between users.

The basic functions of SIP include location of an end point, signal of a desire to

communicate, negotiation of session parameters to establish the session, and teardown of

the session once established.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 76/803

The SIP is an application-layer control protocol

Used to create, modify and terminate sessions with one or more participants.

SIP can also be used to invite participants to already existing sessions, such as

multicast conferences.

Media can be added to (and removed from ) an existing sessions.

Session Description Protocol (SDP) is an application layer control protocol for describing

multimedia sessions. SDP is a text-based protocol. During a SIP call, SDP is used to

negotiate the media type, coding scheme, and address for establishing a session.

Real-Time Transport Protocol (RTP),RTP provides E2E services for real-time data such asaudio and video, and provides a means for checking transmission quality for two

communicating parities.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 77/803

SIP message classification

Request message

Response message

Response messages are responses to request messages and indicate the success or failure

status of calls. Different response states are distinguished using status codes. A status code

consists of three digits. The first digit indicates the response type, and the other two digits

provide detailed description about the response.

Status

Codes

Response

MessageDescription

1xxInformation

response

Indicates that a request message has been received and is

being processed.

2xxSuccess

response

Indicates that a request is received, processed, and

successfully accepted.

3xxRedirection

response

Indicates that a further operation is required to complete a

request.

4xxCustomer

error

Indicates a request message contains a syntax error or the

SIP server cannot process the request message.

5xx Server errorIndicates the SIP server is faulty and cannot process

messages correctly.

6 Gl b l f lt I di t th t t b f lfill d SIP

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 78/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 79/803

MGCP is a master/slave protocol that allows a call control device such as MGC(Media

Gateway Controller, also known as Call Agent) to take control of a specific port on a

MG(Media Gateway).

MGCP messages are carried over UDP(User Datagram Protocol). Because UDP does not

guarantee message delivery, messages are retransmitted, if needed.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 80/803

MGCP is short of description capability, and is limited to big MGW. For big MGW, H.248

protocol is suggested. MGCP message transaction is born on UDP package over broadband IP network, while

H.248 could be born on UDP/TCP/SCTP.

Compared with the MGCP and H.248 has the following advantages:

Support more types of access technology and mobility of the terminal

Support a large-scale network applications and protocols expand, stronger flexibility

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 81/803

In a VoIP network, the actual voice data (conversations) are transported across the

transmission media using Real-Time Transport Protocol (RTP).RTP defines a standardized

packet format for delivering audio and video over the Internet.

RTP defines a standardized packet format for delivering audio and video over the Internet.

It was developed by the Audio/Video Transport Working Group of the IETF and first

published in 1996 as RFC 1889, which was made obsolete in 2003 by RFC 3550.

Applications that use RTP are less sensitive to packet loss but are typically very sensitive to

delays, so UDP is a better choice than TCP for such applications.

RTP typically runs on top of UDP so that it can use the multiplexing and checksum services

of that protocol. RTP does not have a standard TCP or UDP port on which it

communicates. The only standard that it obeys is that UDP communications are done via

an even port, and the next higher odd port is used for RTCP communications. Although

there are no standards assigned, RTP is generally configured to use ports 16384 to 32767.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 82/803

RTP provides end-to-end network transport functions that are intended for applications

transmitting real-time requirements, such as audio and video. Those functions include

payload type identification, sequence numbering, time stamping, and delivery monitoring.

RTP is a critical component of VoIP because it enables the destination device to reorder

and retime the voice packets before they are played out to the user. An RTP header

contains a time stamp and sequence number, which allows the receiving device to buffer

and to remove jitter and latency by synchronizing the packets to play back a continuous

stream of sound. RTP uses sequence numbers to order the packets only. RTP does not

request retransmission if a packet is lost.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 83/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 84/803

Datagram protocols, such as UDP, send the media stream as a series of small packets. This

is simple and efficient; however, packets can be lost or corrupted in transit. Depending on

the protocol and the extent of the loss, the client may be able to recover the data with

error correction techniques, may interpolate over the missing data, or may suffer a data

dropout. RTP and the RTCP were specifically designed to stream media over networks.

They are both built on top of UDP.

RTCP is a sister protocol of the RTP. It was first defined in RFC 1889, which was replaced

by RFC 3550. RTP provides out-of-band control information for an RTP flow. It works

along side RTP in the delivery and packaging of multimedia data, but it does not transport

any data itself. Although it is used periodically to transmit control packets to participants in

a streaming multimedia session, the primary function of RTCP is to provide feedback on

the quality of service being provided by RTP.

RTCP is used for QoS reporting. It gathers statistics on a media connection and information

such as bytes sent, packets sent, lost packets, jitter, feedback, and round-trip delay.

Applications use this information to increase the quality of service by perhaps limiting flow

or using a low-compression codec instead of a high-compression codec.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 85/803

DTMF signal in telephones has two purposes: one is used for DTMF to dial, to control the

switch to connect the called user phone; Second is used to remote control the various

actions of telephones through DTMF signal, such as broadcasting messages, voice mail,

etc., and can be done to remote control home appliances equipment by additional circuit

such as open or close functions. The former solves the DTMF signals sending and coding,

the latter solves the DTMF signals receiving and decoding.

The DTMF keypad is laid out in a 4×4 matrix, with each row representing a low

frequency, and each column representing a high frequency.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 86/803

The essential difference between in-band and out-of-band is whether the DTMF is

transmitted in the media stream.

Carrying DTMF signal in INFO of SIP signaling.

This method is to use the INFO of the SIP signaling to clearly define DTMF signal.

Main defects is the SIP control signaling and media transport (RTP) is separate, it is

easy to cause DTMF signal and the media package are not synchronized. Simple, for

example, in the Voice Mail applications, the users input a DTMF signal according to

the prompt, then leave messages. Servers began to save the user's message after

receiving the DTMF signal. The DTMF signal is transmitted by SIP signaling, and the

media stream is transmitted by RTP , the users may receive the RTP packets firstly,however, the INFO messages of the DTMF signal delay, lead to Server without

saving the user's voice mail until you receive the INFO message.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 87/803

Transparent transmission

Transparency is to transmit directly RTP packets of DTMF audio digital signal without

any processing in the IP network. It should transmit possibly together with the user

voice media stream. Program wants to know which package has DTMF signal and

which kind of the DTMF signal, must check media streaming data in each RTP

packet real-time, analyzing the frequency domain. Because of the influence of the

network packet loss, sometimes resulting in DTMF signal loss, and the mixed DTMF

tones in the voice packets prone to bias, making signal distortion.

RFC 2833

RFC 2833 DTMF is to combine the DTMF signal into a packet according to the rules

and format, are identified with special RTP packets, can be known that the package

is DTMF package in the RTP packet head domain, and know the content of DTMF

signal that RFC2833 has defined. This approach has the advantage of tolerant of

packet loss is high and recognition error rate is low. So the RFC2833 way widely is

used at present.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 88/803

Transparent fax: Fax signals are transmitted transparently as G.711 packets. G.711 faxes

feature low delay and simple implementation, but they occupy a high bandwidth (fixed at

64 kbit/s) and are easily affected by network conditions. Therefore, G.711 faxes are

recommended on a good network condition and not recommended when network jitter

or packet loss frequently occur. G.711 faxes are applicable to high-speed and low-speed

faxes.

T.38 fax: T.30 fax signals are converted to T.38 packets for transmission on a packet

switching network. T.38 faxes occupy a low bandwidth, provide high reliability with

redundant frames and forward error checking (FEC), and are slightly affected by the

network condition. However, the implementation is complicated. T.38 faxes are applicable

only to low-speed fax services due to delay generated by the packet switching network.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 89/803

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 90/803

T.38 fax: T.30 fax signals are converted to T.38 packets for transmission on a packet

switching network. T.38 faxes occupy a low bandwidth, provide high reliability with

redundant frames and forward error checking (FEC), and are slightly affected by the

network condition. However, the implementation is complicated. T.38 faxes are applicable

only to low-speed fax services due to delay generated by the packet switching network.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 91/803

1. D;

2. AC.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 92/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 93/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 94/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 95/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 96/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 97/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 98/803

IPT: IP Telephon;

The IP Telephony (IPT) system provides efficient, reliable voice communications services and also avariety of advanced, quality, and convenient supplementary voice services for private network users.

The IPT system employs multiple new technologies to continuously reduce enterprises' operation

costs and increase their operation profits.

The IPT system has the following highlights:

Employs state-of-the-art communications technologies to maintain its leading position in the

private network communications field.

Aligned with actual services to ensure a highly available communications system.

Ensures high reliability (carrier-class) and stability.

Adapts to rapid service changes, as it features high scalability, flexible setting modifications,

convenient operation and maintenance, and rapid system deployment.

Fully uses existing system resources and the telephone network, saving long-term operation

costs.

Standard and open. It can directly or indirectly connect to carrier networks, third-party PBXs,

billing systems, recording systems, and directory systems.

Provides a unified GUI-based management tool for convenient, comprehensive system

management.

With more than two decades of accumulated experience in the IP communications field and deep

understanding of customer requirements, Huawei transplants its telecom products and advanced

design concepts to the voice communication architecture and launches a brand new IP-based voice

communications solution which provides a reliable efficient and future-proof communications

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 99/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 100/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 101/803

eSpace IPT solution uses a hierarchical system architecture that features high convergence,

security, and openness.

Terminal

Delivers consistent user experience from anywhere, at any time, on multiple devices

including IP phones, analog phones, fax machines, smart phones, and tablets. IP

phones provide diverse easy-to-use functions and high-quality voice call services,

including speed dial, call transfer, automatic callback, multi-party call, corporate

directory, and voicemail.

An analog phone is a traditional desktop phone that converts vibrations into

electrical frequency signals for transmission. It can connect to the system through a

subscriber board on eSpace U1911/U1960/U1981 or through an eSpace IAD.

An eSpace IAD is a voice over IP (VoIP) and fax over IP (FoIP) media access gateway.

It connects analog phones or fax machines to an IP network for providing efficient

and quality voice or fax services.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 102/803

IP PBX

A unified gateway is deployed at the call management layer to achieve thesefunctions. The call management layer provides user registration, call routing, call

control, and media control functions.

eSpace U1911/U1960/U1980/U1981 uses a highly-integrated SIP softswitch as its

core and supports both narrowband and broadband services.

Application

The service application layer provides a variety of services, including the Console,

Unified Message Service, Voice Mailbox, Voice Conference, Call Detail Record (CDR),

Network management and Recording services.

The eSight system is a new-generation comprehensive operation and maintenance

solution developed by Huawei for the network infrastructure, unified

communications, telepresence conferencing, video surveillance, and data center in

enterprises. eSight supports unified monitoring and configuration management over

devices of various types and from various vendors, monitors and analyzes network

and service quality, and delivers unified management over and association analysis

among enterprise resources, services, and users. Meanwhile, eSight offers a flexible

and open platform for enterprises to customize software development and build an

intelligent management system tailored to individual needs.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 103/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 104/803

The eSpace U1900 series unified gateways are switches used in Huawei unified

communications solutions. The eSpace U1900 series unified gateways provide professional

voice over IP (VoIP) servies that meet communication requirements of various enterprises.

The unified gateway uses a highly-integrated SIP softswitch as the core and supports both

narrowband and broadband services, helping effectively improve communication efficiency

and reducing operating expense (OPEX).

The unified gateway can connect to analog phones and IP phones at the same time:

Connect to local analog phones directly. (U1980 cannot directly connect to local

analog phones.)

Use IP bearer networks to connect to analog phones through eSpace IADs.

Use IP bearer networks to connect to IP phones.

The unified gateway can connect to PSTN networks or dedicated network voice switches

through digital, analog, and broadband SIP trunks.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 105/803

Huawei eSpace Integrated Access Device (IAD) is used in Huawei IP telephony and Unified

Communications (UC) solution to connect traditional analog users to IP telephony

networks.

By reusing legacy analog endpoints, eSpace IAD helps reduce initial investments in building

IP telephony networks. eSpace IAD also reduces analog lines' routing and maintenance

costs and enterprises' Total Cost of Ownership (TCO) by fully leveraging the transmission

resources of IP networks.

The full series of eSpace IAD products support 2 to 224 analog user channels to fit the

access scenarios of different user capacities.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 106/803

Video IP Phone:

eSpace 8950 is a smart, sleek video phone that integrates voice, video, and UnifiedCommunications (UC) applications. It delivers more engaging communication and

collaboration, with unmatched security, High Definition (HD) audio and video,

simplicity, and smooth operation.

Audio IP Phone:

eSpace 7900 series IP phones are new-generation IP phones with superb

performance. The innovative design delivers an intuitive, easy-to-use experience,

enabling users to benefit from highly efficient communications

eSpace 6805 is a cost-effective starter-edition IP phone that provides rich functions

and is easy to use.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 107/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 108/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 109/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 110/803

The One Number Link You (ONLY) service refers to a service in which a user's

multiple terminals share the same number and supplementary services.

The shared number is the number of an intra-office terminal, and is called the

ONLY number. The intra-office terminal is the primary terminal and can be specified

by the user. When other users dial the ONLY number of the user, the terminals of

the user ring according to the preset rules, and the user can select one terminal to

answer the phone.

A maximum of eight terminals can be configured (including the primary terminal)

that are bound to the ONLY number.

Advantages:

It is easy to remember one number and use this number to contact a

person.

You can answer important calls anytime and anywhere, which improves

the working efficiency.

You can give only the office number but keep your mobile phone

number and home telephone number private.

Enterprises can protect customer resources from being lost due to

employee transfer.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 111/803

Flexible modes can be used to convene a conference, such as system convening (the

system automatically convenes participants at a specified time), chairman convening, and

active access.

Web-based conference management is supported. Operations such as conference

reservation, announcement, participant attribute modification, and conference delay

setting can be performed on Web pages.

It is recommended to use the conference call service according to the following

specification:

A maximum of 960 conferences with a maximum of 60 parties in each conference

for the U1980. The total number of all parties in all conferences does not exceed

960.

A maximum of 360 conferences with a maximum of 60 parties in each conference

for the U1960. The total number of all parties in all conferences does not exceed

360.

A maximum of 12 conferences with a maximum of 12 parties in each conference for

the U1930. The total number of all parties in all conferences does not exceed 12.

A maximum of 20 conferences with a maximum of 60 parties in each conference forthe U1911. The total number of all parties in all conferences does not exceed 60.

A maximum of 6 conferences with a maximum of 6 parties in each conference for

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 112/803

Manager A has two secretaries: secretary B and secretary C who share two lines. The value

of Shared line mode  is set to Single. The two shared lines allow two calls at a time.

When there is an incoming to manager A's number, secretaries B and C's phones ring at

the same time. The indicator of the shared line on manager A's phone blinks. One of the

secretaries answers the call and forwards the call to manager A. While manager A is

answering the call, another call is routed to manager A's number. Secretaries B and C's

phones ring at the same time. One secretary answers the new incoming call.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 113/803

Shared line

When a user makes an incoming call, the shared line indicators on both the manager

and secretary's phones blink. The manager can answer the call directly. Alternatively,

the secretary can answer the call first, and call the manager through the private line

to ask the manager whether to answer the call. The incoming call to the shared line

is held, and the user hears the waiting tone.

The manager and secretary's phones display the same incoming call information and

shared line status such as ringing, talking, and idle. If the manager is using the

shared line for making a call, the shared line is displayed as occupied on the

secretary's phone. On the contrary, if the secretary is using the shared line for

making a call, the shared line is displayed as occupied on the manager's phone.

Private line

The incoming call can be switched between the manager and secretary for any

times. During the call with the user, the manager can press the private line key to

call the secretary and transfer the call to the secretary. The incoming call to the

shared line is held, and the user hears the waiting tone. When the secretary presses

the shared line key, the call is connected to the secretary, the manager hangs up,

and the user talks with the secretary.

The manager private line and secretary private line can be configured as a speed dial

number of each other. In this way, the manager and secretary can call each otherwithout dialing any numbers.

Each shared line supports only one call. A manager can have a maximum of six

shared lines, while a secretary can also have a maximum of six shared lines.

Each shared line requires two device IDs. One is the manager device ID, which is

configured for a line key on the manager's phone. The other is the secretary device

ID, which is configured for a line key on the secretary's phone. Six shared lines

require twelve device IDs in total. All shared line device IDs of the manager

correspond to the same SIP number.

Multiple shared lines can be implemented on multiple terminals. The number of

terminals subjects to the phone model (for example, the eSpace 7910 IP phone

supports a maximum of three registered accounts, and the eSpace 7950 IP phone

supports a maximum of six registered accounts). When the multiple shared lines of

the manager are configured on multiple IP phones, the simultaneous ringing service

can be used to implement private line calls. When a secretary calls the private line of

the manager, multiple IP phones of the manager ring simultaneously. The manager

can pick up any IP phone to answer the call, and other IP phones stop ringing.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 114/803

The U1911, U1960, and U1981 unified gateways provide built-in Voice Mailbox Services

(VMS) to implement recording, storage, and retrieval of voice messages for voice users.

When users have unread messages, the system notifies the users of the unread message

for them to read the messages in time.

Voice messages are stored in the SD card of the MTU board. They can be backed up to the

NFS server (prepared by the customers themselves), and the backup voice messages can be

restored from the NFS server.

By default, voice messages are not encrypted, and they can be obtained by message

backup or directly reading the SD card. The voice messages can be encrypted as required.

Others cannot play the encrypted voice messages even if they have obtained them.

The voice mailbox feature requires the corresponding license, and the number of

concurrent messages is limited by the license.

The specifications of the built-in voice mailbox for each eSpace U1900 model:

Model Maximum Number of Voice Mailbox Users Maximum Number of Concurrent Messages

U1911 100 12

U1960 1000 30

U1981 1200 30

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 115/803

A contact center agent can log in to the SoftConsole using an account assigned by the

ConsoleServer. After the account is authenticated by the ConsoleServer, the agent can use

agent functions.

When a user dials the access code of a SoftConsole group, the unified gateway routes the

call to an idle agent in the group, who will then answer the call. Incoming calls are queued

if all agents in the group are busy. When one or more agents become available, the system

routes queued calls to agents following the "first-come, first-served" policy.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 116/803

The recording system uses the latest digital electronics technologies and enables users to

record and query multiple channels of telephony conversation. The recording system is

widely used in governments, financial organizations, energy companies, hospitals,

educational institutions, and other sectors, which helps supervise service quality and

resolve disputes.

The recording system can monitor the recording status and record conversational

information, including the phone number, call time, and conversational content, in real

time.

The recording system consists of a recording module, a recording query and playback

module, a status monitoring module, a storage management module, and a user rights

management template.

Two modes of site recording are supported: automatic recording and on-demand

recording.

 automatic recording:The start and end of automatic recording are signaling-

controlled. That is, the recording system automatically starts recording when a

conversation is started between the specified users, and stops recording when the

conversation ends.

On-demand recording is controlled by users using a special recording button on

phones or a softkey. Recording can be manually stopped by pressing the recordingbutton or automatically stops when the conversation ends. On-demand recording

takes effect on a per call basis. Users need to press the recording button each time

they want to record a call

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 117/803

In an enterprise, employees in the same field can be added to a hunt group, with the

group access code configured. When a user dials the group access code, the phones of

the sign-in group members ring simultaneously, cyclically, or sequentially according to the

configured routing policy. The hunt group service enables employees in the same field to

work together for more efficient request processing.

A user can be added to multiple hunt groups to handle different service requirements.

When a call is connected to a hunt group through the hunt group access code, personal

services (such as call forwarding and DND) for the hunt group members, if enabled, will be

unavailable.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 118/803

Application Scenario

In an enterprise, employees in a department (for example, IT support department)

have been added to a hunt group with a unified access code, and simultaneous

ringing has been configured for the hunt group. During the office hours, all group

members sign in to the hunt group. When a user dials the access code of this hunt

group, the phones of all employees in this hunt group ring at the same time. After

an employee answers the call, the phones of the other employees stop ringing.

If sequential ringing is configured, the phone of the desired employee (whose phone

is expected to ring first according to the configured routing policy) rings first. If the

desired employee cannot answer the call, the call is diverted to the next expected

number.

When no employee in the hunt group answers the call, the call is forwarded to the

forward-to number configured for the hunt group access code. For example, the

hunt group has configured call transfer to the voice mailbox upon ringing timeout.

During the break, if a user dials the hunt group access code, no one answers the

call. When ringing times out, the system asks the user to leave a message. After the

user leaves a message, the MWIs on the phones of all members in the hunt group

are lit up. When the group members go back to work and find that the MWI is on, a

member presses the corresponding button on the phone, enters the password, and

listens to the message. Then, the MWIs on the other phones are turned off.

Sign-in, sign-out, and presence.When a user dials the access code of a hunt group, the

system allocates the call to group members who have signed in to the hunt group.

Dynamic sign-in and sign-out.Hunt group members need to dial Dynamic sign-

in/sign-out prefix + Hunt group access code + # to sign in to or sign out of a hunt

group.

Static sign-in. Members of a hunt group sign in automatically and cannot sign out.

One-button sign-in, sign-out, and presence. Hunt group members can configure the

sign-in and sign-out programmable button on IP phones. Users can press the button

to quickly sign in and out. The indicator of the programmable button is on after

sign-in and off after sign-out.

Requiring a verification password for sign-in and sign-out. Users can configure a

verification password for sign-in and sign-out. A verification password contains 6

digits.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 119/803

A paging group supports only one channel broadcast at the same time. If an initiator is

broadcasting, the other initiator cannot initiate broadcast.

The audio paging service has a higher priority than all services excluding DND. Users can

also configure the priority between audio paging and DND.

If the emergency call service is configured, users can associate an emergency call prefix

with a paging group. When an intra-office user (the user may not be in the paging

group) dials the emergency call prefix, the communication between the calling party and

the called party will be broadcast on the phones of members in the associated paging

group.

Audio paging service is one to many unidirectional voice broadcast service.

By default, all members in a paging group can be the initiator of voice broadcast; External

users cannot initiate a voice broadcast.

The service process is as follows:

An initiator dials the access code of a paging group, and speaks after hearing a

beep.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 120/803

 

The voice broadcast players of all external paging parties in the paging group play

the voice broadcast, and the IP phones of all unicast and multicast parties respond

as follows:

If a recipient is idle or has not started a call after picking up the phone, the

speaker is automatically started and plays the voice broadcast after a beep.

If a recipient is in a call, the voice broadcast is played as a whisper in audio

mixing mode.

If a recipient has enabled the DND service, the system determines whether to

play the voice broadcast to the recipient based on the service priority

configured for the paging group.

The initiator stops speaking and hangs up. The voice broadcast is stopped for all

recipients.

Model Maximum

Number

of Paging

Groups

Maximum Number of Members in a Paging Group Maximum

Number of

External Paging

Parties Globally

eSpaceU1910/

U1930

2•

Unicast party + External paging party + Associatedemergency call prefix: 2 (where the maximum number of

external paging parties is 1)

•Multicast party: all SIP users

1

eSpace

U1911

16 •Unicast party + External paging party + Associated

emergency call prefix: 30 (where the maximum number of

external paging parties is 8)

•Multicast party: all SIP users

8

eSpace

U1960

32 •Unicast party + External paging party + Associated

emergency call prefix: 30 (where the maximum number of

external paging parties is 8)•Multicast party: all SIP users

8

eSpace

U1980

64 Unicast party + Associated emergency call prefix: 30

NOTE: The eSpace U1980 does not support multicast parties

or external paging parties.

0

eSpace

U1981

64 •Unicast party + External paging party + Associated

emergency call prefix: 30 (where the maximum number of

external paging parties is 8)

•Multicast party: all SIP users

8

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 121/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 122/803

A single-node network is suitable for an enterprise with no more than 20,000 users that

does not have branches or has branches that do not require local regeneration. In such a

network, the unified gateway and a variety of service servers are all deployed at the

enterprise's equipment room, and all terminal users register with the unified gateway. If

the enterprise has small-sized branches, eSpace IADs can be deployed at branches and

function as proxies for user registration to the unified gateway, or IP phones can be

deployed at branches and register with the unified gateway.

Networking Description

Analog phones and fax machines connect to the unified gateway through analog

phone cables. IP phones and SoftPhone connect to the unified gateway through IPnetwork.

The unified gateway connects to the PSTN through the trunk.

The unified gateway provides voice mailbox and voice conference services for

enterprise users.

By default, the unified gateway functions as an IP PBX and can provide basic and

supplementary voice services for enterprise users. The unified gateway can also

function as an access gateway and register with the IMS network through a SIP

trunk, allowing enterprise users to use services provided by the IMS network.

Only the U1911/U1960/U1981 supports the built-in voice mailbox function.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 123/803

A centralized call management network can be used for an enterprise with no more than

20,000 users that has branches that require local regeneration. In such a network, the

unified gateway functioning as the central node and a variety of service servers are all

deployed at an enterprise's equipment room, and all terminal users register with the

central node in normal conditions. Unified gateways functioning as branch nodes are

deployed at the branches for local outgoing calls and local regeneration.

Networking Description

The unified gateway in the HQ is called the central node, which can be

U1911/U1960/U1980/U1981. The central node can be deployed in active/standby

mode, one being the active node and the other being the standby node.

The unified gateway gateway in a branch is called a local node, which can be

U1911/U1960/U1980/U1981.

The central node and local nodes connect to the PSTN through digital or analog

trunks.

The central and local nodes are connected through SIP trunks and use the heartbeat

mechanism to monitor the running status of the peer devices.

When the central node and local nodes are connected properly:

Users and services are configured and controlled in a unified manner on the

central node.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 124/803

Analog phones on local nodes are registered with the central node through

local node proxies.

Local nodes synchronize SIP user data from the central node in real time.

When the central node is faulty or disconnected from local nodes:

The basic call function remains available for analog users on local nodes.

When detecting that the central node is faulty or disconnected, IP phones on

a local node automatically set the local node as the SIP server. The basic call

function remains available for SIP users on the local node.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 125/803

When reconstructing or expanding the traditional PBX-based network, you can use the

U1900 to interconnect with the existing PBX to implement the smooth expansion and

provide new services. This scheme is the interconnection networking of the U1900 and

traditional PBX.

The scheme keeps the traditional PBX device and existing PBX subscribers. The networking

mode is that the traditional PBX device connects to the U1900.

Functioning as the IP phone gateway, the U1900 converts and bridges data for voice

services on the traditional PBX, and controls call connections through signaling.

The trunk resources of the PSTN are reserved for the traditional PBX. These resources

function as an alternative option of original PBX subscribers.

For the phone subscribers and terminals on the IP network, the U1900 functions as the

softswitch center, trunk gateway, and signaling gateway. It controls connections, supports

new services, manages user data, and manages charging for VoIP subscribers.

Through interconnections between multiple U1900s, a wide area VoIP network can be

created among business subscribers. In addition, multiple services and functions can be

created, such as, the group service, multi-party conference, call center, and instant

communication in wide area.

The subscribers of the traditional PBX can be transferred to the U1900 network in future.

The engineers can implement the transfer only by adding subscriber boxes or IADs and

transferring the traditional PBX trunk resources to the U1900

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 126/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 127/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 128/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 129/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 130/803

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 131/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 132/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 133/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 134/803

U1900 uses a highly-integrated SIP softswitch as its core and supports both narrowband

and broadband services. Terminals are connected to U1900 in different ways:

Local analog phones: directly connected

Analog phones: connected through the IAD over the IP network

IP phones and console client: connected over the IP network

As a core component of the solution, the unified gateway provides the following

functions:

P2P audio and video calling, conference calling, and diverse supplementary

telephony services.

Active/standby redundancy, remote disaster recovery, and local regeneration

(active/standby redundancy and remote disaster recovery are alternative).

Connection to the PSTN or PBXs in a private network through digital, analog, or SIP

trunks.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 135/803

U1900 uses a highly-integrated SIP softswitch as the core and supports both narrowband

and broadband services, helping effectively improve communication efficiency and

reducing operating expense (OPEX).

U1900 can connect to analog phones and IP phones at the same time: Connect to

local analog phones directly. (U1980 cannot directly connect to local analog phones)

Use IP bearer networks to connect to analog phones through IAD.

Use IP bearer networks to connect to IP phones.

U1900 can connect to PSTN networks or dedicated network voice switches through

digital, analog, and broadband SIP trunks.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 136/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 137/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 138/803

Slots are located on the front panel of the shelf. The U1911 provides one main control

board slot, three interface board slots, one power supply sockets, and one fan tray

assembly slot.

Slots 0 to 2 are service board slots, which are used to install the MTU, ASI, OSU or

BTU boards.

Slot 3 is the main control board slot, which is used to install the SCU board.

The number of U1911 interface boards is determined by the system capacity. Filler panels

must be inserted into blank slots.

To ensure that basic services are functioning properly, at least one SCU board and one

MTU board must be configured for the U1911.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 139/803

Slots are located on the front panel of the shelf. The U1960 provides one main control

board slot, seven interface board slots, two power supply sockets, and one fan tray

assembly slot.

Slots 0 to 6 are service board slots, which are used to install the MTU, ASI, OSU or

BTU boards.

Slot 7 is the main control board slot, which is used to install the SCU board.

The number of U1960 interface boards is determined by the system capacity. Filler panels

must be inserted into blank slots.

To ensure that basic services are functioning properly, at least one SCU board and one

MTU board must be configured for the U1960.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 140/803

Slots are located on the front panel of the shelf. The U1981 provides two main control

board slot, six interface board slots, two power supply sockets, and one fan tray assembly

slot.

Slots 0 to 2 and 4 to 6 are service board slots, which are used to install the MTU,

ASI, OSU or BTU boards.

Slot 3 and 7 are the main control board slot, which is used to install the SCU board.

When only one SCU board is installed, the system runs in single-node control mode. When

two SCU boards are installed, the system runs in active/standby control mode and has a

higher reliability.

The number of U1981 interface boards is determined by the system capacity. Filler panels

must be inserted into blank slots.

To ensure that basic services are functioning properly, at least one SCU board and one

MTU board must be configured for the U1981.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 141/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 142/803

SCU: Service Control Unit.

SCU is the control board (a mandatory board) of the U1911/U1960/U1981. The SD carddelivered with an SCUB board contains the default announcements in 11 languages. On

the U1911/U1960/U1981 with an SCUB board, you can directly switch the announcement

language. The system extracts the voice package for the target language from the SD

card, overwrites the original voice package in the version software, and synchronizes the

voice package to all MTU boards.

The SCU board provides the following functions:

Provides the softswitch functions.

Processes media control protocols.

Supports L2 switching and TDM switching.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 143/803

Panel Components

PanelComponent

Identifier Description

Ports 100/1000BASE-TX

Service network port that connects the device to a LAN andfunctions as an IP service port.

CONSOLE

Debugging serial port for configuring and commissioning thedevice.

USB Reserved for the service to extend interfaces when required(not used currently).

AUDIO 3.5 mm audio input port for connecting external audio sources.It is used for playing music on hold (MoH).

Indicators PWR Power indicator (green), which indicates the power status.

RUN Running indicator (green), which indicates the running status ofthe board.

ALM Alarm indicator (red), which indicates the alarm status of theboard.

Button RST Press to restart the board.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 144/803

To make data and transmission more secure and reliable, you are advised to use the dual-

network-port or triple-network-port mode.

In dual-network-port mode triple-network port mode:

Network port 0 must be used for accessing the web management system, LMT

command tree, and CLI.

Network port 0, 1 or 2 can be used for accessing the web self-service system.

Only one network port can be used to connect to the Bill Server.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 145/803

The MTU board provides four E1/T1 ports, each of which supports two trunks.

The MTU board is in common used on the U1911/1960/U1981.

Each U1911/U1960/U1981 must be equipped with at least one MTU board.

PanelComponent

Identifier Description

Ports E1/T1 Digital trunk port for connecting to the upper-level office (forexample, LE) through digital trunks. An E1/T1 port supports aDB9 connector.The MTU board provides two E1/T1 ports, each of whichsupports two trunks.

CONSOLE This serial port is disabled.Indicators PWR Power indicator (green), which indicates the power status.

RUN Running indicator (green), which indicates the running statusof the board.

ALM Alarm indicator (red), which indicates the alarm status of theboard.

LOS Signal loss indicator (yellow), which indicates whether signalsare lost.

RFA Remote alarm indicator (yellow), which indicates whetherpeer devices are faulty.

Button RST Press to restart the board.SD card slot None SD card slot for housing an 16 GB SD card. The SD card is

used to store recording files of the built-in voice mailbox.

Jumper None A jumper fitting used during E1/T1 switching. When the T1

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 146/803

The BTU board is in common used on the U1911/1960/U1981.

One BRI trunk can provide 2 voice channel.

Panel Components

PanelComponent

Identifier Description

PortsBRI S/T

BRI trunk port, which supports an RJ-45 jack. It supportsone BRI trunk for two channels of voice services.Each BTU board provides four BRI ports.

CONSOLE This serial port is disabled.

Indicators

PWR Power indicator (green), which indicates the power status.

RUNRunning indicator (green), which indicates the runningstatus of the board.

ALMAlarm indicator (red), which indicates the alarm status ofthe board.

- BRI trunk port activity indicator (yellow), which is always off.

-BRI trunk port connection indicator (green).

•Blinking (4 Hz): The line is properly connected.

•Off: The line is not properly connected.

Button RST Press to restart the board.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 147/803

The ASI board is used with U1981/U1960/U1911.

Panel Components

PanelComponent

Identifier Description

PortsFXS 1-32

FXS ports for connecting the device to a maximum of 32analog phones. The port supports a DB68B connector.

CONSOLE This serial port is disabled.

Indicators

PWR Power indicator (green), which indicates the power status.

RUNRunning indicator (green), which indicates the runningstatus of the board.

ALMAlarm indicator (red), which indicates the alarm status of theboard.

Button RST Press to restart the board.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 148/803

The OSU board is used with U1981/U1960/U1911.

Panel Components

PanelComponent

Identifier Description

Ports

FXS 1-12FXS ports for connecting the device to a maximum of 12analog phones. The port supports a DB68B connector.

FXO 1-12FXO ports for connecting the device to a maximum of 12analog trunks. The port supports a DB68B connector.

CONSOLE This serial port is disabled.

Indicators

PWR Power indicator (green), which indicates the power status.

RUNRunning indicator (green), which indicates the runningstatus of the board.

ALMAlarm indicator (red), which indicates the alarm status of theboard.

Buttons RST Press to restart the board.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 149/803

U1981/U1960/U1911 share the same module.

The U1911 supports only one power module.

The U1960 and U1981 can be equipped with two power modules. By default, only one

power module is configured and is in slot 2 for the power supply. When two power

modules are configured, the following functions are supported:

Equalizing currents and backing up power supplies When working normally, each

power supply module shares the load with output current. When a power supply

module stops working, the other power supply module continues to work.

Supporting hot swapping You can insert a power supply module directly into a

vacant slot of the power distribution frame without powering off the

U1911/U1960/U1981. When a backup power supply module is installed, you can

remove a power supply module without affecting the running of the

U1911/U1960/U1981.

When two power supply modules are configured, you cannot configure both the AC and

DC power supply modules on an U1960/U1981.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 150/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 151/803

Height:6U(1U=44.5mm)

Indicators in the U1980 shelf

Indicator Identifier Description

Powerindicator(green)

POWERIndicates the power status.

•On: The power supply is normal.

•Off: There is no power supply.

Runningstatusindicator(green)

RUN

Indicates the running status of the device.

•On: The board is faulty.

•Blinking (at 4 Hz): The board is writing data to the FlashMemory when the system is running.

•Blinking (at 0.5 Hz): The system runs normally.•Off: There is no power input, the board is faulty, or thesystem is starting.

Alarmindicator(red)

ALARM

Indicates the alarm status of the device.

•Blinking (at 4 Hz): A critical alarm is generated.

•Blinking (at 0.5 Hz): A major alarm is generated.

•Blinking (at 0.25 Hz): A minor alarm is generated.

•Off: No alarm is generated.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 152/803

Slots 0-1 are SMCU slots used to install the SMCU boards.

Slots 2-9 are interface board slots used to install interface boards, SC1-MRS boards, theseboards can be used together.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 153/803

SMCU

Provides the SoftSwitch functions.

Processes media control protocols.

Supports L3 switching and Time Division Multiplex (TDM) switching.

Supports hot swap.

Supports 1+1 hot backup. When the active board is faulty, the standby board

automatically replaces the active board.

MRS

The MRS provides the following functions: number allocation, digit collection, voice

playing, recording, voice conference, conversion from the TDM signaling to the VoIP

signaling, T.30 fax, supporting G.711, G.729 and iLBC. The SC1-MRS provides 256

channels for processing the media resources.

The MRS supports load sharing. When all the boards run normally, they share loads

evenly. When a board is faulty, other normal boards share the load to ensure the

normal running of the system.

DTU

The DTU board is a digital trunk interface board. It provides 4/8 E1/T1 ports and a

debugging port.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 154/803

PDF: Power Distribution Frame.

The power switch is used to power on and power off the U1980.

The power module slots are used to install power modules. The numbers of the

three slots from left to right are 0, 1, and 2. If there is a vacant slot, insert a blank

filter panel into it. If there is no vacant slot, inserting a blank filter panel will

generate a power alarm.

The alarm tone mute button is used to mute the alarm tone when the equipment

gives out alarms.

The power supply module provides the following functions:

Equalizing currents and backing up power supplies By default, an U1980 has one

power supply module installed in slot 0. If an U1980 has two power supply modules

installed, it can equalize currents and back up power supplies. When working

normally, each power supply module shares the load by providing separate output

current. When a power supply module stops working, the other power supply

module continues to work.

Supporting hot swapping You can insert a power supply module directly into a

vacant slot of the power distribution frame without powering off the U1980. Whena backup power supply module is installed, you can remove a power supply module

without affecting the running of the U1980.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 155/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 156/803

The U1911/U1960/U1981 uses digital trunk cables, high-density user cables, and DC

power cables.

The U1911/U1960/U1981 uses digital trunk cables to connect various inter-office

trunk devices.

75-120-ohm transfer box converts 75-ohm unbalanced E1 signals to 120-ohm

balanced E1 signals for connection using E1 trunks.

Analog phones use high-density user cables to connect to FXS ports of the

U1911/U1960/U1981.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 157/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 158/803

The SCU board (main control module) integrates functional modules such as the main

control module, narrowband switching module, security logic module and two broadbandswitching modules.

The MTU board (media resource module + digital trunk module) contains the media

processing module (DSP + CPU), E1/T1 trunk module, and SD card storage module.

The ASI board (analog user module) provides analog user access.

The OSU board (analog user module + analog trunk module) provides analog user access

and analog trunk access.

The BTU board (digital trunk module) provides BRI trunk access.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 159/803

The system is divided into the following planes based on the function:

System plane: includes the operating system, database, timer, memory management,task management, and interface commissioning functions.

Driver plane: includes the RS232 serial port communication, network chip, hardware

chip, and FPGA logical drivers.

Protocol plane: processes data for SIP, AT0, POTS, PRI, R2, QSIG, and Q.921.

Transfer plane: includes the board and card management, inter-board communication,

and message forwarding functions.

Service control plane: includes the call control, connection management, resourcemanagement, user management, SoftConsole management, registration management,

and CDR generation functions.

Maintenance and management (M&M) plane: includes the CLI, web management,

LMT, log/alarm processing, tracing, and license management functions.

Messages transmitted among planes are scheduled and encapsulated in a unified manner,

effectively reducing system complexity and further improving reliability.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 160/803

Signaling /Protocol

Function

SS7 Enables the communication between the unified gateway and switchessupporting the SS7 signaling and enables the unified gateway to access E1trunks provided by the switches.

PRA Enables the communication between the unified gateway and the switcheson the ISDN and enables the unified gateway to access E1/T1 trunksprovided by the switches on the ISDN.

BRI Enables the communication between the unified gateway and the switcheson the ISDN and enables the unified gateway to access BRI trunks providedby the switches on the ISDN.

R2 Enables the communication between the unified gateway and traditional

switching devices and enables the unified gateway to access E1 trunksprovided by the traditional switching devices.

QSIG Enables the communication between the unified gateway and switchessupporting the QSIG signaling and enables the unified gateway to accessE1/T1 trunks provided by the switches.

SIP Enables the interconnections between unified gateways and connects theunified gateway to IADs and SIP multimedia packet terminals.

AT0 Connects the PSTN and switches. It is a DC loop analog trunk (also callednarrowband trunk) and enables intra-office users to have voicecommunications with outer-office users through the obtained traditional

phone lines, achieving easy narrowband access.Telnet Connects LMTs or remote operation and maintenance terminals to unified

gateways.

SSH2 Secures remote logins to an LMT or an operation and maintenance terminal

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 161/803

The unified gateway in the HQ is called the central node, which can be

U1911/U1960/U1980/U1981. The unified gateway gateway in a branch is called a local

node, which can be U1911/U1960/U1980/U1981.

The central node and local nodes connect to the PSTN through digital or analog

trunks.

The central and local nodes are connected through SIP trunks and use the heartbeat

mechanism to monitor the running status of the peer devices.

When the central node and local nodes are connected properly:

Users and services are configured and controlled in a unified manner on the central

node.

IP phones on local nodes are directly registered with the central node.

Analog phones on local nodes are registered with the central node through local

node proxies.

Local nodes synchronize SIP user data from the central node in real time.

When the central node is faulty or disconnected from local nodes:

The basic call function remains available for analog users on local nodes.

When detecting that the central node is faulty or disconnected, IP phones on a local

node automatically set the local node as the SIP server. The basic call function

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 162/803

The disaster recovery mechanism is described as follows:

Two central nodes are deployed in two places, and each central node has oneunified gateway deployed. The two unified gateways work in active/standby mode,

known as an active node and a standby node. The active and standby nodes are

connected using the TCP protocol. They also use a heartbeat mechanism to

constantly check each other's status. The service servers are deployed at the central

node where the active unified gateway resides.

When the active and standby nodes are running correctly, all users register with the

active node. The active node processes all user requests and synchronizes data to

the standby node in real time. At least 1 Mbit/s bandwidth must be reserved fordata synchronization, and the round trip time (RTT) must be shorter than 80 ms.

When the active node fails, the standby node takes over all services from the active

node and processes all user requests.

A trunk gateway can be deployed for connecting to the PSTN. If the trunk gateway

is not deployed, the active and standby nodes both connect to the PSTN. When the

active and standby nodes are running correctly, the active node routes calls to the

PSTN through trunks. When the active node is faulty, the standby node routes calls

to the PSTN through trunks.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 163/803

1. A;

2. D.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 164/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 165/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 166/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 167/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 168/803

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 169/803

This chapter are based on the

eSpace_U1910&U1911&U1930&U1960&U1981_V200R003C00_Quick_Installation

 _Guide_01 and eSpace U1900 Series Unified Gateway Produc Documentation.

For more information, please go to http://e.huawei.com to find more related documents. 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 170/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 171/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 172/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 173/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 174/803

The sudden and momentary electric current that flows between two objects at different

electrical potentials caused by direct contact or induced by an electrostatic field.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 175/803

  : 

Antistatic wrist strap:

An antistatic wrist strap, ESD wrist strap, or ground bracelet is an antistatic

device used to safely ground a person working on very sensitive electronic

equipment, to prevent the buildup of static electricity on their body, which

can result in electrostatic discharge (ESD). It consists of an elastic band

of fabric with fine conductive fibers woven into it, attached to a wire with a

clip on the end to connect it to a ground conductor.

ESD(ElectroStatic Discharge) 

Electrostatic discharge (ESD) is the sudden flow of electricity between two

electrically charged objects caused by contact, an electrical short, or dielectric

breakdown.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 176/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 177/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 178/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 179/803

Major installation environment check items:

N

o

.

Check

Item

Requirement

1 Auxiliary

equipme

nt

The equipment room is equipped with specialized air conditioners, fire control facilities,

and good lighting facilities. Double aluminum alloy windows and doors are installed in

the equipment room. In addition, the auxiliary devices such as cabinets, distribution

frames, and cabling trays have been installed in the equipment room.

2 Moisture-

proof

The dehumidity devices such as air conditioners with the dehumidifying function and

special dehumidifiers must be installed in the equipment room where the relative

humidity is higher than 90%. Water seepage, dripping, and dew producing are forbidden

in the equipment room.

3 Lightning

protectio

n

Lightning-proof equipment such as lightning rods and lightning strips must be installed in

the equipment room. In addition, the lightning-proof grounding (that is, the grounding of

lightning-proof equipment such as lightning rods) must share a grounding body with the

protection grounding of the equipment room.

4 Dust-

proof

If the equipment room is close to a dust source, such as a coal mine, a country road or a

farmland, aluminum alloy windows and fireproofing doors must be installed in the

equipment room.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 180/803

 

N

o

.

Check

Item

Requirement

5 Grounding Joint grounding is used in the equipment room. That is, the working ground, protection

ground, and lightning-proof ground share a grounding body. Various communication

equipment and power supplies should share a protection ground bar. The grounding

resistance is less than 1 ohm.

6 AC power

supply

Stable AC power supply must be available in the equipment room to meet the power

requirements of the equipment. The AC power distribution switch and AC power cables

are installed properly. The AC voltage is 220 V, the power is 300 W, and the conducting

wire can accept a current of 3.5 A.

7 DC power

supply

The AC voltage is –48 V, the power is 350 W, and the conducting wire can accept a

current of 9 A.

8 UPS power

supply

If the UPS power supply is required for the equipment, the UPS power supply must be

installed before deployment, and the output power meets the requirements.

9 Shipment

information

The software and hardware purchased by Huawei have been delivered to the customer

site, with complete packages.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 181/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 182/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 183/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 184/803

ESD Measures

To guarantee board safety, employ dedicated ESD bags and boxes when transporting

or storing boards.

Wear a well-grounded ESD wrist strap when holding, removing or inserting boards,

and insert the ground end to the ESD jack of the shelf

Unpacking Boards

Electronic circuit is vulnerable to the ESD. When handling a board, wear the ESD wrist

strap that is properly grounded and touch only the edge of the board.

Boards are put into ESD bags in transportation. Before unpacking boards, take ESD

measures. Moreover, note the effect caused by the ambient temperature and humidity.

Generally, an ESD bag contains desiccant to absorb the moisture inside the bag. When

a board is moved from a cold and dry place to a hot and damp place, wait at least 30

minutes before unpacking the board. Otherwise, the moisture condensed on the board

surface may damage the board.

To unpack boards, do as follows:

1. Check the bag of each board for any damages.2. Wear an ESD wrist strap and ground it properly.

3. Open each bag and check the board inside it for any damages.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 185/803

T1 trunk notes:

If you want to use the T1 trunk, you must remove the jumper caps on the CVP

board (U1910&U1930) or MTU board (U1911&U1960&U1981).

Switch the trunk mode on U1900.

Built-in VMS service notes:

If you want to use the built-in VMS service (U1911&U1960&U1981) or

customize the system announcements, ensure that you have installed an SD

card in slot 0 of the MTU board.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 186/803

Connect the main control board of U1900 to the switch according to the networking data

plan. The adaptive network ports support both straight-through and crossover cables.

Notes: 

By default, the network port mode of the control board is single-network-port mode. So

connect the first network port to the switch, and add more network ports to the switch

if settings are changed.

Connect and fasten one end of the E1/T1 trunk cable to the E1/T1 port on the

CVP or MTU board, and connect the other end to the E1/T trunk cable of the

peer device directly or through the distribution frame. Connection rules:

E1 cable: For the same link number X, connect local TX to peer RX and local

RX to peer TX.

T1 cable: For the same link number X, connect local RX/TX to peer RX/TX。 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 187/803

CVP and MTU boards provide LOS and RFA to indicate the E1/T1 connection status. If the

light is off, the connection status is normal. Otherwise, please check the connection is Ok

or not. The two E1 channels in the CVP board share one pair of indicators, only the two

channels both work normally the indicators are off.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 188/803

For more indicators information in different boards, please refer to the U1900 product

document.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 189/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 190/803

default IP address of the U1910/U1911/U1930/U1960/U1981 is 192.168.1.17, while the

default IP address of the U1980 is 192.168.1.85. Their default gateway addresses are the

same, which is 192.168.1.1.

The default user name and config password are admin and Change_Me.

1. An operation and maintenance terminal (a PC) is available. The PC must:

Have an Ethernet adapter installed and support TCP/IP.

The web browser can only be Internet Explorer 7.0/8.0/9.0 that supports ActiveX and

Javascript.

Support the resolution of 1024 x 768 or higher (1280 x 1024 recommended).

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 191/803

2. Connect the network cables

Select either of the following two modes for networking based on actual network

requirements:

Use a straight-through cable to connect the network port of the unified gateway tothe network adapter port of the PC.

Use a straight-through cable to connect the network port of the unified gateway to

a switch or a hub, which is then connected to the PC.

Notes: 

In single-network-port mode, you can log in to the web management system

through network port 0 or 1 on the SCU board (U1911/U1960/U1981) or SMCU

board (U1980).

In dual-network-port or triple-network-port mode, you can log in to the web

management system only through network port 0 on the SCU board

(U1911/U1960/U1981) or SMCU board (U1980).

3. Set the IP address of the PC

The IP address of the PC must be on the same network segment as that of the unified

gateway and cannot conflict with IP addresses of other devices.

4. Set the web browser.

To ensure system security, the unified gateway does not support SSL 2.0/3.0. To avoid a

login failure, in the web browser, choose Tools > Internet Options > Advanced, select TLS

1.0/1.1/1.2, and deselect SSL 2.0/3.0.

LMT tools description: 

go to http://e.huawei.com,download the LMT tool based on the version of the

U1900.

CLI command description:

Download putty ( support SSH, Telnet and console port )

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 192/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 193/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 194/803

Here we use the Web management system to view the license information, you can alos

use LMT or CLI to view Tehran license, the detailed command is “ show license “. 

License Key parameters

Parameter Description

Total users Number of users to be allocated.

CTI users Number of SoftConsole clients.

Voice Mail nums Number of concurrent voice mailboxes.

Conference users Number of concurrent users in an audio conference.

NOTE:This parameter is available only for

the U1911/U1960/U1980/U1981.

Local Survival Right Local survival switch.

Redundancy Backup

Right

Two-node active/standby switch.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 195/803

Besides supports loading the license by Web management system, it also supports loading

license by LMT or Putty + FTP Server.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 196/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 197/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 198/803

The default IP address of the U1910/U1911/U1930/U1960/U1981 is 192.168.1.17, while

the default IP address of the U1980 is 192.168.1.85. Their default gateway addresses are

the same, which is 192.168.1.1.

The default “user name “ and “password “ are“admin” and“Change_Me”。 

Network port 0 must be used for accessing the web management system, LMT command

tree, and CLI.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 199/803

Network Port Mode of the Control Board

The SCU board (U1911/U1960/1981) and the SMCU board (U1980) support the

following network port modes: single-network-port mode, dual-network-port mode,

and triple-network port mode.

In different network port modes, each network port processes different data streams. The

following table lists the data streams that can be processed by each network port in

different modes. To make data transmission more secure and reliable, you are advised to

use the dual-network-port or triple-network-port mode.

Network port modes

In dual-network-port mode and triple-network port mode,

Network port 0 must be used for accessing the web management system, LMT

command tree, and CLI.

Network port 0, 1 or 2 can be used for accessing the web self-service system.

Only one network port can be used to connect to the BillServer.

Network

Port Mode

Network Port 0 Network Port 1 Network Port 2

Single-

network-

port mode

Processes all data streams and connects

to the BillServer.

This network port

and network port 0

work in

active/standby

mode.

Not used.

Dual-

network-

port mode

•Processes the following streams and

connects to the BillServer:Network

management packets: Telnet, Secure

Shell (SSH), Simple Network

Management Protocol (SNMP), Trivial

File Transfer Protocol (TFTP), FTP server

(FTPS), web management server, or

proprietary protocols for

communicating with the business

management unit (BMU), Business

Management Platform (BMP), and LMT

•Protocol packets: RADIUS/SNTP

Processes all data

streams and

connects to the

BillServer.

Not used.

Triple-

network-

port mode

•Processes the following streams and

connects to the BillServer:Network

management packets: Telnet, SSH,

SNMP, TFTP, FTPS, or proprietary

protocols for communicating with the

BMU, BMP, and LMT

•Protocol packets: RADIUS/SNTP

Processes all data

streams and

connects to the

BillServer.

Connects to the

BillServer.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 200/803

You can use the Web management system to configure the IP address, and you can also

use the CLI to configure the IP address.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 201/803

Different countries and regions are in different time zones. Therefore, you must set the

time zone of the unified gateway to that of the country or region where the unified

gateway is deployed. The system default time zone is GMT +8:00.

Some countries or regions use the DST, and you must configure DST rules on the unified

gateway. When DST rules are configured, the unified gateway can display the DST time

correctly.

The unified gateway supports two time setting methods: manual setting and time

synchronization with the NTP server. For more information about the NTP server settings,

please refer to U1900 product document.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 202/803

The unified gateway supports two working modes: IMS and PBX (default).

PBX mode

PBX is short for private branch exchange, allowing an enterprise to manage

external incoming calls and internal calls in a group manner. When set to PBX

mode, the unified gateway can function as an IP PBX and support basic voice

communication (communication between intra-office users, and

communication based on narrowband and broadband trunks), point-to-point

video communication, fax, and supplementary services (such as voice

conferencing, automatic switchboard, and call transfer).

IMS mode

IMS stands for IP multimedia subsystem. It is a brand-new multimedia service

system that can meet the new and diverse multimedia service requirements of

terminal users. When set to IMS mode, the unified gateway can function as an

access gateway and register with the IMS network through a SIP trunk,

allowing enterprise users to use services provided by the IMS network. Based

on settings, the unified gateway can use its own services in IMS mode

Set the working mode of a device to IMS when the device is connected to the IMS

network. Otherwise, set the working mode of the device to PBX.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 203/803

Board information

Board Device Model Description

CVP U1910/U1930 •Provides the softswitch functions.

•Processes media control protocols.

•Provides Layer 2 switching and TDM switching functions.

ASI U1910/U1911/U1930/U19

60/U1981

An ASI board connects the unified gateway to plain old telephone

service (POTS) phones. Each ASI board supports a maximum of 32 POTS

phones.

OSU U1910/U1911/U1930/U19

60/U1981

An OSU board connects the unified gatewayto POTS phones or analog

trunks. Each OSU board supports a maximum of 12 POTS phones or

analog trunks.

SCU U1911/U1960/U1981 A Service Control Unit (SCU) board functions as a softswitch. It

processes media control protocols and provides Layer 2 (L2) and time

division multiplexing (TDM) switch functions. An SCU board supports

single-network-port, dual-network-port, and triple-network-port

working modes.

MTU U1911/U1960/U1981 An MTU board provides digital trunk access for connection to the

upper-level office through digital trunks. It also provides digit

collection, announcement playing, recording, conferencing, TDM-to-

VoIP conversion, and T.30-to-T.38 fax functions.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 204/803

 

For the U1911/U1960/U1981, to add an MTU board, enter the value for Number of VMS

Channels, select Yes for Conference board, and click OK on the displayed MTU Parameter

Configuration page. The number of VMS channels refers to the license capacity, that is, the

number of calls being concurrently forwarded to mailboxes

In the Parameter configuration area, set Transmission mode and Transcoding codec and

click OK.

Key parameter description:

Transmission mode and Transcoding codec are two independent parameters. Specifically, the

transcoding codec ALAW orULAW can be selected regardless of whether the transmission

mode is E1 or T1. Generally, the transcoding codec is set to ALAWwhen the transmission mode

is E1 and set to ULAW when the transmission mode is T1. The actual configurations are based

on site requirements.

Click Data Save in the upper right corner of the web management system.

Parameter Description

DTU Module Indicates the switch of the digital trunk module. If you need to configure E1/T1 trunks on

the U1910/U1930, selectOn; otherwise, selectOff .

Transmission

mode

The unified gateway supports the E1 and T1 modes, but does not support mixed use of the

two modes. The PRA and QSIG trunks support the E1 and T1 modes. Other narrowband

trunks support only the E1 mode.

NOTE:If T1 is used as the transmission mode of PRA or QSIG trunks, on the E1/T1 port

controller of the CVP board (U1910/U1930), MTU board (U1911/U1960/U1981), or DTU4

board (U1980), remove or insert the jumper caps (total eight behind the panel) to adjust to

the Balance mode. Otherwise, T1 trunks will be unavailable.

Transcoding

codec

When selectingALAW or ULAW as the codec, ensure that the configuration is the same as

the configuration of the peer device; otherwise, the call quality between users of the local

and peer devices will be affected.

Board Device Model Description

BTU U1911/U1960/U1981 A BTU board provides digital trunk access. Each BTU board provides

four BRI S/T ports and supports eight voice channels.

SMCU U1980 Supports the following functions:

•Provides the softswitch functions.

•Processes media control protocols.

•Supports three working modes: single-network-port mode, dual-

network-port mode, and triple-network-port mode.

•Provides Layer 3 switching and TDM switching functions.

MRS U1980 Is a mandatory board and provides the following functions:

•Allocates numbers, collects digits, and plays announcements.

•Supports recording, conference, TDM-to-VoIP conversion, and T.30-to-

T.38 fax.

•Supports G.711, G.729, and iLBC voice codecs.

•Provides 256 channels for processing media resources.

DTU4

/DTU

8

U1980 Provides digital trunk access for connecting to the digital trunk of the

upper-layer office.

BTU U1911/U1960/U1981 A BTU board provides digital trunk access. Each BTU board provides

four BRI S/T ports and supports eight voice channels.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 205/803

Backing up a data file

Log in to the U1900 Web management system, Choose System > FileManagement., Click Download.

Loading a data file

Log in to the U1900 Web management system, Choose System > File

Management., Click Browse, select the data file (data.bin) to load, and click

Upload.

As long as the main control board versions and the board type ( including the board

slot) are the same, the sip user and password can be recovered from one U1900 to

another U1900.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 206/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 207/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 208/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 209/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 210/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 211/803

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 212/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 213/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 214/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 215/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 216/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 217/803

Notes 

End of Life Announcement

IAD208E(M) is End of Marketing, more information please go to enterprise.Huawei.com.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 218/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 219/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 220/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 221/803

The IAD132E(T) is 1 U high (1U = 44.45mm), which can be installed in the standard 19-

inch cabinet meeting the International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) standard.

The front panel of the IAD132E(T) has four Ethernet ports, one maintenance serial port,

one Reset button and five indicators.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 222/803

The IAD132E(T) can be inserted with boards of two types, that is, FXO & FXS Unit (OSU)

and Analog Subscriber Interface (ASID) board.

OSU board

Each OSU provides 8 Foreign Exchange Subscriber (FXS) ports and 8 Foreign

Exchange Office (FXO) ports, supporting eight POTS users and 8-port analog trunk.

FXS: foreign exchange subscriber port, used for connecting a POTS telephone.

FXO: foreign exchange office, that is, the interface between a POTS telephone

and a digital telephony switching system, used for connecting to the PSTN and

obtaining a PSTN number. The FXO port can be used for binding an intra-

office number, so that when a PSTN-side user calls the PSTN number of an

FXO port, the called number is switched to an intra-office number.

ASID board

 Each ASID board provides 16 FXS ports, supporting 16 POTS users.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 223/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 224/803

Generally, an IAD196 can work with only one main control board and one service board.

You can insert more service boards based on the system capacity. In addition, you must

insert filler panels into vacant slots.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 225/803

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 226/803

Generally, an IAD1224 can work with only one main control board and one service board.

You can insert more service boards based on the system capacity. In addition, you must

insert filler panels into vacant slots.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 227/803

The CVP boards functions as the main control board. It mainly manages devices, controls calls,

processes media, performs narrow-band switching, and performs switching between the internal

and external Ethernets.

Service network interface FE1/FE2

Used to connect to superior devices.

Used to cascade connection between IAD1224s.

Maintenance network interface LAN

Used to configure and debug the IAD.

Indicator Name Color Status Description

Power

indicator

PWR Green •When the indicator is steady on, the power supply is normal.

•When the indicator is off, no power supply is received.

Running

indicator

RUN Green •When the indicator blinks at 1 Hz, the board is being started.

•When the indicator blinks at 2 Hz, the board is writing data into

the Flash memory when the IAD1224 is started or running.

•When the indicator blinks slowly (at 0.5 Hz), the board is

normal.

•When the indicator is off, no power supply is received or the

board fails to run.

Alarm

indicator

ALM Red •When the indicator blinks at 2 Hz, an alarm is generated.

•When the indicator blinks at 4 Hz, a critical alarm is generated.

•When the indicator is off, no alarm is generated.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 228/803

An ASI board (POTS interface board) provides 32 POTS user ports. Connect the DB-68

male connector of the user cable to a port on the ASI port, and connect the FXS line to the

user phone port.

ASI indicators

Indicator Name Color Status Description

Power indicator PWR Green •When the indicator is steady on, the power supply is normal.

•When the indicator is off, no power supply is received.

Running indicator RUN Green •When the indicator blinks at 4 Hz, the board is loading

software.

•When the indicator blinks at 2 Hz, the user is in off-hookstate.

•When the indicator blinks at 0.5 Hz, the board is running

properly and in idle state.

•When the indicator is off, no power supply is received or the

board fails to run.

Alarm indicator ALM Red •When the indicator blinks at 2 Hz, an alarm is generated.

•When the indicator blinks at 4 Hz, a critical alarm is

generated.

•When the indicator is off, no alarm is generated.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 229/803

An OSU board (FXO and FXS interface board) provides 12 POTS user ports and 12 FXO

user ports. Connect the DB-68 male connector of the user cable to a port on the ASI port,

and connect the FXS line to the user phone port, and the FXO line to the PSTN port.

OSU indicators

Indicator Name Color Status Description

Power indicator PWR Green •When the indicator is steady on, the power supply is

normal.

•When the indicator is off, no power supply is received.

Running indicator RUN Green •When the indicator blinks at 4 Hz, the board is loading

software.

•When the indicator blinks at 2 Hz, the user is in off-hook

state.

•When the indicator blinks at 0.5 Hz, the board is running

properly and in idle state.

•When the indicator is off, no power supply is received or

the board fails to run.

Alarm indicator ALM Red •When the indicator blinks at 2 Hz, an alarm is generated.

•When the indicator blinks at 4 Hz, a critical alarm is

generated.

•When the indicator is off, no alarm is generated.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 230/803

The IAD1224 uses two power supply modules that can be swapped and work in

active/standby mode. The AC and DC power supplies are supported.

1 Power switch 2 AC power socket 3 Invalid, not

enabled (no

operations

available

through RJ45

ports)

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 231/803

Procedure

The IAD power-off survival function is available only after the cables are connected. Thecables are connected as follows:

Connect the PSTN cable to the FXO port on the IAD. For example, port 8 in slot 1

connects to the yellow and blue FXO line pair.

Connect the phone cable to the FXS port on the IAD. For example, port 0 in slot 1

connects to the red and green FXS line pair.

When powered off, the IAD automatically connects the phone on the FXS port to the

corresponding PSTN cable.

When the IAD power-off survival is enabled, the number of the phone on the FXS port

becomes the number that the PSTN network carrier assigns to the FXO port. The PSTN

network carrier also specifies the dialing rule for the IAD.

Verification

To verify the power-off survival function of the IAD, proceed as follows:

Power off the IAD.

Make a call to an external phone number using a phone that connects to FXS port 0on slot 1.

If the call can be connected, the power-off survival function is enabled. If the function is

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 232/803

Mapping between user cable colors, FXO ports, and FXS ports on the OSU board

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 233/803

Prerequisites

If the protocol mode is set to SIP.

When IADs are assigned with static IP addresses, the local-switch function is

available among local IAD or multiple IADs. If the DHCP or PPPoE mode is selected,

the local-switch function is only available for the local IAD.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 234/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 235/803

1.A

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 236/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 237/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 238/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 239/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 240/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 241/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 242/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 243/803

The account root for the Web Management System and that for the command line

interface (CLI) are the same. If you change the password of the root, use the new

password to log in to the Web Management System or the CLI.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 244/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 245/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 246/803

If you changed the IP address of the IAD, you can do as follows to obtain the IP address.

Dial *127 on the phone connected to the IAD, and then the voice announcementplays the IP address.

Log in to the IAD through the serial port and run the display ip address command in

the common user mode to view the IP address of the device.

IAD 104 don’t provide users with the web management system.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 247/803

After you log in to the system, you can click Change Password at the upper right corner of

the page to set a new password. After the password is set, record related data.

By default, the protocol is SIP.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 248/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 249/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 250/803

There are three methods for obtaining the IP address. Select a method according to the

actual network.

Click Static and enter the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway.

Click DHCP. The IAD automatically obtains the IP address from the DHCP server.

Click PPPoE and enter the user name and password.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 251/803

This chapter just introduce the configuration mode, for the detailed configuration step,

please refer to《 OUC1202 U1900 Intra-Office Call》.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 252/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 253/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 254/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 255/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 256/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 257/803

1.AC

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 258/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 259/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 260/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 261/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 262/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 263/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 264/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 265/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 266/803

An Analog Subscriber Interface (ASI) board provides 32 Foreign Exchange Subscriber (FXS)

ports.

An FXO/FXS Interface Unit (OSU) board provides 12 Foreign Exchange Subscriber (FXS)

ports and 12 Foreign Exchange Office (FXO) ports.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 267/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 268/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 269/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 270/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 271/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 272/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 273/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 274/803

UTP: Unshielded Twisted Paired.

IAD:As the media access gateway of Voice over IP (VoIP) and Fax over IP (FoIP). The IADconverts analog voice data into IP packets and transmits data through the IP network.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 275/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 276/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 277/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 278/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 279/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 280/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 281/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 282/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 283/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 284/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 285/803

eSpace 7903X is a multi-functional IP phone expansion module. It is used with eSpace

7950 to provide various functions, including speed dial, phone lock, phone sleep, and

contact group. With a single eSpace 7903X, eSpace 7950 increases the number of

programmable buttons to 40 and provides optimized viewing through the 5-inch color

LCD screen. eSpace 7903X helps users use eSpace 7950 more efficiently with better user

experience.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 286/803

IP phone has built-in downward double Ethernet switch port.

Support the bridge mode, sharing network, a network cable can solve all problems.

An internal double port Ethernet switches support the RJ-45 interface directly connected

to the 10/100/1000 base-t Ethernet, and provides a local area network (LAN) connection

that used to connect the phone and PC in the same position.

System administrators can specify different WLAN for PC and phone (802.1 Q), which

provides voice and data traffic with higher safety and reliability.

eSpace 7870, 7850, 7830, 7820 and 7810 support the bridging function. The device

connected to the PC port of an IP phone can access the network connected to the LAN

interface of the IP phone and can communicate with other devices in the network. In this

case, the IP phone acts as a switch with two interfaces but the working mode is different

from the working mode of a normal switch. Special configurations are performed at the

lower layers of an IP phone to separate the broadcast packets between the two interfaces.

Therefore, the IP phone is not affected by a large number of broadcast packets.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 287/803

Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is a protocol for dynamically managing and

configuring users in a centralized manner. It uses the Client/Server structure. A DHCP client

sends the DHCP server a request to apply for parameter settings, including the IP address,

subnet mask, and default gateway. Then the DHCP server sends the parameter settings to

the DHCP client.

DHCP features

Plug and play property

The client can obtain the IP addresses and associated parameters without

configuration, simplify client network configuration, reduce maintenance

costs.

Unified management

All the IP address and related information are unified managed and allocated

by the DHCP server.

Use of high efficiency

Enhance the use efficiency of IP address through IP address lease

management.

Achieved across a network segment

Can implement agreement message interaction between the client and DHCP

server among different subnets through the DHCP relay

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 288/803

DHCP (dynamic host configuration protocol) evolved from the BOOTP protocol is used to

automatically allocate a client computer the IP address of a standard protocol that is

defined in RFC 2131.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 289/803

PoE:Power over Ethernet

support the PoE function. When not being connected to a power adapter, a clientcan obtain power from a PSE device (a PoE switch such as the S3900) to worknormally.

support the mode of free-line power supply and mode of signal-line power supply.When the PoE function is used, the reliable power supply distance is up to 100meters.

POE system advantages: 

PoE reduces investment spending and the total electrical equipment deploymentcosts in the unified IP infrastructure.

PoE is free for the terminal equipment installation wall power supply, thus reducesthe cost associated with supporting terminal equipment.

Install the network connection device in the place that difficultly deploying local ACpower source, which provides greater flexibility.

POE system: 

PSE(Power Sourcing Equipment): Power supply equipment for the Ethernet clientdevice, and also is the power supply manager of the whole process of POE Ethernet,such as switches.

PD(Power Device): Accept the PSE load, namely the client devices for POE system,

such as IP phone.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 290/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 291/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 292/803

In general, retain the default configuration of voice codec priority for deployment. If the

network environment is complex, you can adjust the codec priority according to the actual

network bandwidth.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 293/803

Access the phone web page as an administrator. Choose Advanced > Media.

Noise Suppression: When noise occurs in the audio collected by the IP phone, the IP phoneautomatically suppresses the noise. The voice quality decreases as the noise suppression

capability increases.

Echo Cancellation: The IP phone conceals the acoustic echoes that occur in the

microphone to minimize the effects of the local audio card shift.

Voice Activity Detection: The IP phone conceals the acoustic echoes that occur in the

microphone to minimize the effects of the local audio card shift.

Automatic Gain Control: The IP phone automatically adjusts the volume and level to deliver

optimal audio experience. In the database engine, users can enable and disable the AGC

function and query the running status of the AGC function. AGC classifies into the analog

AGC and digital AGC. In the analog AGC, the IP phone adjusts the microphone input to

provide optimal audio experience. While, in the digital AGC, the IP phone adjusts the PCM

waveform.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 294/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 295/803

eSpace IP phones support the Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) function. The packets

sent by an IP phone are labeled with tags. This makes packets transmitted in a separate

voice VLAN, and the stability of VoIP packets is ensured.

Each VLAN is a broadcast domain. Hosts in a VLAN communicate with each other as if

they were in a LAN. Hosts in different VLANs cannot directly communicate with each

other.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 296/803

DiffServ:Differentiated Services. Due to development of the market and change of

competition environment, carriers must provide different levels of services for subscriber

groups with different requirements. The solution of differentiated services is promoted to

meet this demand. The services of high qualities are offered to subscribers with high

priorities, while the services of low qualities are offered to subscribers with low priorities.

VLAN auto-configuration mechanisms:

a, the automatic configuration based on the configuration file

b, the automatic configuration based on the LLDP-MED

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 297/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 298/803

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 299/803

Phone support SRTP media layer encryption, using AES128 algorithm encrypted

transmission to ensure the transmission safety.

Transport Layer Security (TLS) and its predecessor, Secure Sockets Layer (SSL), are

cryptographic protocols that provide communications security over the Internet.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 300/803

A device provides ports for clients to access a LAN. The ports support the following access

control modes:

Authorized-force: A port in this mode allows clients to access network resources

without authenticating the clients.

Unauthorized-force: The device does not authenticate clients accessed through a

port in this mode.

Auto: A port in this mode allows clients to send and receive packets but does not

allow clients to access network resources before authentication succeeds. If

authentication succeeds, the port allows clients to access network resources. This

mode is mostly used.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 301/803

The authentication process is as follows:

1. A client sends an EAPOL-Start packet to a device.

2. The device receives the packet and sends an EAP-Request/Identity packet,

requesting the client to send the user name. The device encapsulates frames from

the client into a packet and sends the packet to the authentication server.

3. The client sends the user name that is contained in the EAP-Response/Identity

packet to the device.

4. The authentication server searches the database for the user name in the packet

and obtains the corresponding password. The authentication server uses a

randomly generated encryption key to encrypt the password and sends the

encryption key to the device through the Access-Challenge packet.

5. The device sends the encryption key to the client.

6. The client receives the EAP-Request/MD5 Challenge packet containing the

encryption key. The client uses the encryption key to encrypt the password,

generates an EAP-Response/MD5 Challenge packet, and sends the packet to the

device. The device sends the packet to the authentication server.

7. The encryption algorithm is irreversible normally.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 302/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 303/803

802.1x authentication:

MD5 authentication: authenticated by user name and password

EAP-TLS authentication: authenticated by the certificated built in an IP phone,

featuring higher security

VLAN configuration mode:

LLDP mode: The data switch delivers audio VLAN information to an IP phone

through the LLDP protocol. To use this mode, the data switch must support the

LLDP function. This mode is enabled for the IP phone by default.

DHCP Option mode: Users can set the Option 132 and 133 fields to the ID and portnumber of the audio VLAN respectively. Then, an IP phone can obtain audio LAN

information through the option fields.

Manual configuration: Users can manually configure audio VLAN information on the

network configuration screen on an IP phone.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 304/803

Answer:1.A。 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 305/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 306/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 307/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 308/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 309/803

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 310/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 311/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 312/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 313/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 314/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 315/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 316/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 317/803

If a static IP address is required for eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950, set IPv4 Settings to Static.

Obtain an IP address, subnet mask, gateway address, and DNS address from your network

administrator.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 318/803

If Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet (PPPoE) is required for eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950,

set IPv4 Settings to PPPoEObtain the user name and password for your PPPoE dialup

connection from your network administrator.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 319/803

Obtain the IP address of the IP phone.

On the phone login screen, choose More > Network > Status > Network and viewthephone's IP address.

On the phone home screen, choose Apps > Status > Network and view the phone's

IPaddress.

Open a web browser and enter the phone's IP address in the address box.

Enter the administrator account and password, and click Log In.

The default administrator account is admin, and the default administrator password is

admin123. To ensuresecurity, change the administrator password at your first login.

If you enter the password incorrectly for three consecutive times, the IP address of

the PC or terminal you are using will be denied to access the IP phone. To continue

to access the IP phone, you can change the IP address of the PC or terminal (a

maximum of ten IP addresses are supported). However, if the IP address has been

changed for ten times and is still denied to access the IP phone, the IP phone will be

locked, denying any IP address to access it. In this case, to access the IP phone, you

need to wait five minutes until the IP phone is unlocked.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 320/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 321/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 322/803

Access the phone web page as an administrator. Choose Advanced > Network.

If the authentication is successful, the device can access resources on the LAN.

If the authentication is failed, the device cannot access resources on the LAN.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 323/803

Access the phone web page as an administrator. Choose Advanced > Network.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 324/803

LAN Port: VLAN setting parameters for the LAN port on an IP phone. The value Enabled

indicates that the VLAN function is enabled for the LAN port.

ID: ID of the VLAN where the IP phone belongs to.After LAN Port is enabled, the

data packets sent by the IP phone carry VLAN tags.The network administrator

divides the network connected to the switch into N VLAN. Each VLAN has a VLAN

ID.

Priority: Priority of the VLAN where the IP phone belongs to. The value ranges from

0 to 7. A larger value indicates a higher priority.

PC Port: VLAN setting parameters for the PC port on an IP phone. The value Enable

indicates that the VLAN function is enabled for the PC port.

ID: This VLAN ID is carried by data packets transmitted upstream through the PC

port. For data packets transmitted downstream through the PC port, if the VLAN ID

in the data packets is the same as the VLAN ID of the PC port, the PC port removes

the VLAN tag from the data packets before transmitting them. If the VLAN ID in the

data packets is different from the VLAN ID of the PC port, the PC port discards these

data packets.

Priority: Priority of the VLAN where the IP phone belongs to.The value ranges from 0

to 7. A larger value indicates a higher priority.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 325/803

PC Port VLAN Filtering: If you select Enable, the phone's PC port allows the following data

packets to pass: data packets that do not carry any VLAN ID, data packets carrying the

VLAN ID of the LAN port, data packets carrying the VLAN ID of the PC port, and data

packets carrying the VLAN ID that is set below PC Port VLAN Filtering.

ID: Indicates the VLAN ID, with which packets are allowed to pass through the

phone's PC port when VLAN Filtering on PC Port is enabled.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 326/803

Fixed IP mode: Users must fill in the IP, subnet mask, network gateway, active and standby

DNSs.

DHCP mode: An IP phone obtains the IP address from the DHCP server automatically.You

can choose to manually enter the DNS server address or enable the IP phone to

automatically obtain an DNS server address.

PPPoE mode: User name and password must be known.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 327/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 328/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 329/803

User needs to be registered to the server when the phone is switched on every time.

User needs to be registered again When the addresses of the SIP Client changes.

Registration information must be refreshed periodically, usually the register saves the

registration information to the Location Server.

Holding the AOR address bound to a Contact, and the Proxy look for the called address

easily when in call.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 330/803

Choose User > SIP User.

Click Create on the SIP User page.

Enter user information on the Add SIP User page that is displayed.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 331/803

Key parameter description

Parameter Description

Start device ID ID of the device from which the configuration starts. The device ID isthe SIP device registration account, for example, SIP user ID

configured during IP phone registration.Device type The Device type parameter is used for the connection between the

unified gateway and a SIP device. The parameter value must be thesame as that specified on the SIP device. If the parameter is set toeSpace, the corresponding number can access the unified gatewayonly through an eSpace soft terminal.

Authenticationmode

This parameter specifies the mode for authenticating a SIP devicewhen it registers with the unified gateway.To improve account security, you are advised to select the IP addressor password as the authentication mode for SIP number allocation.

•NOTE: In password-based authentication, the password by defaultmust be a string of 8–31 characters that consists of at least twotypes of the following characters: digits, letters, and specialcharacters. You can run the config system authentication modesimple command to set the weak password mode. In this mode, thepassword is a string of 1–31 characters and has no complexityrequirements. The password must not be the same as the device IDor device ID in reverse order.

•Except authentication by IP address and password, unified gatewaysupports authentication by IP address segment. You can run the

config add addresspool index [0-n] startip x.x.x.x endip x.x.x.xcommand to configure trusted IP address segment, and selectauthentication by IP address segment when configuring users (Thesetwo configurations can be achieved only using commands).NOTICE: A weak password may pose security risks. Use a weakpassword with caution.

User right level User right levels are listed in the following ascending order: Defaultright < Normal right < Advanced right < Super right. The defaultvalue is Default right. Users with a preset level of rights can usespecified call rights only in specified time segments. Higher-levelusers can reserve trunks for themselves. If there is no available trunk,they can preempt the trunks assigned for lower-level users to makeoutgoing calls.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 332/803

Choose User > SIP User.

Click Create on the SIP User page.

Enter user information on the Add SIP User page that is displayed.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 333/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 334/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 335/803

Configure intra-office prefixes for unified gateway users so that unified gateway users

(intra-office users) can make calls with each other.

Log in to the web management system.

Choose Trunk > Prefix Configuration and click Create.

Configure a prefix in the Create Prefix dialog box

Key parameter description

Parameter escription

Service type •Basic service The service type is a basic audio service such as intra-office calland local call.

•Supplementary service The service type is a supplementary service.

•Intelligent service The service type is a common intelligent service, and iscurrently unavailable.

•SoftConsole service The service type is a softconsole service such as the callwaiting and attendant group in the console.

•Virtual user The service type is a virtual user service such as the phonemeeting, automatic switchboard, and customized VU.

•Card number service The service type is a card number service such as thecall, recharge, password change, balance query, terminal binding, prepaid,or postpaid service.

•Call by Dialing Card Number Users can dial a card number to make intra-office calls, national toll calls, international toll calls, and emergency calls.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 336/803

  Parameter escription

Callproperty

•Intra-office call This option is selected for calls between users under thesame unified gateway.

•Local call This option is selected for local calls.

•National toll call This option is selected for national toll calls.

•International toll call This option is selected for international toll calls.•Emergency call This option is selected for emergency calls, for example, to911.

•Intra-office or local call This option is selected when first digits in a localnumber compose a short number. The call with this attribute is routed tothe intra-office user. If the routing fails, the call is then routed to the localuser in another office.

•Route by number length This option is selected for outgoing calls with thesame prefix but with different number lengths.

•Local regeneration call This option is selected for calls between intra-officeusers and local PSTN users when both active and standby devices in thecentralized call management network mode fail and the local generationfunction is enabled.

Callingnumberchange

Index of a calling number change rule. The calling number change rule isused to change calling numbers, for example, to a switchboard.The priorities of the three number change modes are long number and shortnumber, number mapping, and number change in descending order.

Callingnumbermapping

Indicates whether to display the mapping number of a calling number. If auser is not configured with the long number, the mapping number isdisplayed on the called parties' phones.The priorities of the three number change modes are long number and shortnumber, number mapping, and number change in descending order.

Callednumberchange

Index of a called number change rule. For example, a called number changerule can be as follows: If the calling party dials 912345678, unified gatewaydeletes the outgoing prefix 9 and sends the called number 12345678.The priorities of the three number change modes are long number and shortnumber, number mapping, and number change in descending order.

Callednumbermapping

Indicates whether the mapping number of a called number can be used indialing. If a user is not configured with the long number, the mappingnumber can be used.The priorities of the three number change modes are long number and shortnumber, number mapping, and number change in descending order.

Display longcallingnumber

The long number is a number used for short-number users to makeoutgoing calls or for outer-office users to call short-number users.The default value is No. When the parameter is set to Yes and the user isconfigured with a long number, the calling number is changed to the longnumber for outgoing calls.The priorities of the three number change modes are long number and shortnumber, number mapping, and number change in descending order.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 337/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 338/803

Network Environment: An IP phone selects an appropriate network environment according

to the onsite conditions:

UC2.X: UC2.X network

UC2.0: UC2.0 network

Asterisk: Asterisk network

Broadsoft: Broadsoft network

CC: CC network

IMS+UC: IMS+UC network

Others: other third-party networks

Note: The IP phone needs to be restarted after its network environment is modified.After

the network environment is changed, the IP phone changes the default configuration file

and the default service rights in service rights management accordingly. This facilitates the

setting and use of the IP phone.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 339/803

Sequential: The IP phone sends registration messages to a SIP server at intervals of half of

the registration interval. If the active SIP server is fails, the IP phone registers with the

standby SIP server. If the standby SIP server fails, the IP phone registers with the local SIP

server. Services are interrupted during the SIP server switch. After the IP phone registers

with a SIP server successfully, its services become available again.

Simultaneous: The IP phone registers with the active, standby, and local SIP servers at the

same time. If the active SIP server fails, the standby SIP server takes over the services. If the

standby SIP server also fails, the local SIP server takes over the services. The switching

takes about 3s, which cannot be perceived by users. After the switching, services are

running properly.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 340/803

Log in to U1900 administrator web page.

Choose User > SIP User.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 341/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 342/803

Tick the encoding to be used according the needs, and you can adjust the priority

according moving them up and down. The smaller the priority value, the higher the

priority.

Log in to IP phone Web page.

Choose“Advanced > Media” to enter the configuration page.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 343/803

Access the phone web page as an administrator.

Choose Advanced > SIP Signaling.

SIP Registration Cycle: The IP phone sends registration messages to the server at an

interval of half of the registration cycle.

Re-registration Interval: Interval for the IP phone to re-register with the server upon its

registration failure.

Local SIP Port: SIP port used for listening the IP phone and transmitting SIP signaling.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 344/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 345/803

Time Update Mode: The displayed time on the phone can be automatically and manually

updated.

If a user set the displayed time to be automatically updated, he or she must fill in the

server IP address and the update interval.

If a user chooses to manually update the displayed time on the phone, he or she

must enter the system time by himself or herself.

Time Zone: Time zone of the area where a user locates.

Time Format: 12-hour or 24-hour format.

Date Format: Users can customize the date format based on their favorites.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 346/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 347/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 348/803

On the web page, choose Button > Expansion Module.

Click the gray button next to the programmable button on the expansion module. TheSelect Programmable Button Functions page is displayed.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 349/803

If the number a user dialed matches a preset dialing rule, the phone automatically converts

the number according to that rule and calls the converted number after the preset delay

time expires.

Parameter description

x or X: Represents a digit of 0-9.For example, 135xxxxxxxx indicates an 11-digit

number starting with 135.

[ ]: Matches any digit in [ ].For example, [2-8] indicates any digit of 2-8; [279]

indicates any digit of 2, 7, and 9.

.: Indicates that the digit before dot (.) can appear for any times (for example, not

appear or appear once).The last digit of a dialing rule cannot be dot (.). For example,

92.3 can indicate 93, 923, 9223, and so on.

<:>: If the dialing rule is A<B:C>D, When the number a user dials matches ABD, the

phone automatically replaces B with C and calls ACD. A, B, C, and D in the dialing

rule indicate character strings consist of digits and common signs like asterisks (*),

number signs (#), and plus signs (+). A, B, and D can also contain dialing rule

parameters.For example, When the dialing rule is 1[278]<111:000>XX, the phone

automatically replaces 111 with 000 if the number a user dials matches

1[278]111XX.For example, if the number a user dials is 1211123, the phone

automatically calls 1200023.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 350/803

Scenario Configuration。Configure dialing rules based on the actual usage scenarios. The

functions a dialing rule can implement and the associated scenarios are described as

follows:

Immediate call.

For example, a user wants the phone to automatically call a 5–digit number after the

user dials such a number. In this scenario, set Dialing Rules to XXXXX and Delay to

0.

Delay call For example,.

a user wants the phone to automatically call a mobile phone number starting with

135, 136, 137, 138, or, 139 in 5s after the user dials such a number. In this

scenario, set Dialing Rules to 13[5-9]XXXXXXXX and Delay to 5.

Number replacement

For example, a user wants the phone to automatically replace 0 with 0086 and call

the number after the user dials a mobile phone number starting with 0. In this

scenario, set Dialing Rules to <0:0086> XXXXXXXXXXX.

Number insertion

For example, a user wants the phone to automatically suffix # to a 3–digit number

starting with * and call the number after the user dials such a number. In this

scenario, set Dialing Rules to *XX<:#>.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 351/803

Corporate Directory Server: Server that provides multiple information services including the

corporate directory and corporate presence. You can select Corporate or LDAP from the

Corporate Directory Server drop-down list box.In the UC2.X or UC2.0 network, you can

also choose Corporate(UC2.X) and Corporate(UC1.1).

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 352/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 353/803

Software download path:

Log in to http://support.huawei.com/enterpris, choose ”Downloads > UnifiedCommunications and Collaboration > Unified Communications > Unified Communications

Endpoints” to download the specific version. 

Software package describe:

File Description

eSpace7910V200R003C00.binUpgrade files used for online upgrade orupgrade through eSpace EMS.

UPF-eSpace7910.xmlPolicy templates used for configuration fileupgrade.

Config-eSpace7910.xml Configuration file used for phone deployment.

eSightUI.xmlConfiguration templates used for autodeployment. through eSight UC&C

tools.zip Tools to make Language Package

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 354/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 355/803

1. A。 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 356/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 357/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 358/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 359/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 360/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 361/803

During a call, the party who dials the phone number and initial a call is caller (calling party)

and the other party who answers the call is callee (called party).

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 362/803

PSTN: Public Switched Telephone Network. A telecommunications network established to

perform telephone services for the public subscribers. Sometimes it is called POTS.

POTS: Plain Old Telephone Service. The basic telephone service provided through the

traditional cabling such as twisted pair cables.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 363/803

E.164 Number Mapping (ENUM) is a set of protocols for unifying telephony systems using

Internet. Dynamic Delegation Discovery System (DDDS), DNS, and E.164 are used for

addressing.

ENUM is a standard of IETF. It uses special DNS record types to translate a telephone number

into a Uniform Resource Identifier (URI) or IP address that can be used in Internet

communications. The objective of ENUM is using a single number to replace multiple numbers

and translating the home phone, office phone, fax, cell phone, and email of each individual to

URIs or IP addresses.

MSISDN: Mobile Subscriber International ISDN/PSTN number

ENUM: E.164 NUmber Mapping

E.164 Number Mapping (ENUM) is a set of protocols for unifying telephony systems

using Internet. DDDS, DNS, and E.164 are used for addressing. ENUM is a standard of

IETF. It uses special DNS record types to translate a telephone number into a URI or IP

address that can be used in Internet communications. The objective of ENUM is using a

single number to replace multiple numbers and translating the home phone, office

phone, fax, cell phone, and email of each individual to URIs or IP addresses.

E.164 is an ITU-T recommendation that defines a numbering plan for the world-wide

PSTN and some other data networks and also defines a general format for internationaltelephone numbers. Plan-conforming numbers are limited to a maximum of 15 digits,

and a complete number contains an international call prefix. An E.164 number is an

MSISDN number, which is the number that a calling party needs to dial for reaching a

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 364/803

A call prefix is the string consisting of first few digits or all digits in called numbers. If the

called number is 1234, the call prefix can be:

First digit: 1

First two digits: 12

First three digits: 123

Entire called number: 1234

The prefix groups configured on the U1900 constitute a called number analysis table of

the system. If the called number analysis table contains multiple prefixes for a called

number, the system uses the maximum matching rule to match the called number with aprefix during number analysis.

Assume that the called number is 1234 and the prefixes 1, 12, and 1234 are configured in

the called number analysis table. According to the maximum matching rule, the system

will select the prefix 1234, which is the closest to the called number. The prefixes 1 and 12

do not comply with the rule.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 365/803

The basic service prefixes are classified into two types:

Intra-office prefix: used for intra-office and outer-office users to call intra-officeusers. For example, if the intra-office number ranges from 8000 to 8099, you can

set the intra-office prefix to 8. When calling an intra-office user, you can simply dial

the user number such as 8008.

Outgoing prefix: used for intra-office users to make outgoing calls, such as national

and international toll calls. For example, an outer-office user number is 12345678. If

an intra-office user wants to dial 912345678 to call the outer-office user, the

outgoing prefix 9 needs to be set. The number conversion rule is that the first digit

of the called number is deleted.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 366/803

Why do we convert the calling number?

Generally, the numbers assigned by PBX are short number or extension numberwhich are only valid inside the office but can not be recognized by PSTN. In this

case, when initializing an PSTN outgoing call, system need to convert the private

extension number to public PSTN number. Otherwise, the call will be rejected.

Why do we convert the called number?

Employees are usually required to dial a “0”  or “9”  followed by the actual called

number.Thus the called number with “0”and  “9”  can not be recognized by the

PSTN. So the system need to delete the “0” and “9” before sending it out.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 367/803

In this scenario, two number conversion modes are adopted, the number change and the

long number and short number.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 368/803

Number Change : This topic describes how to define the number change rules for

modifying, inserting, and deleting calling or called numbers.

Long Number and Short Number : A user has two numbers: a short number and a long

number allocated by the PSTN. The short number is used for the calls between intra-office

users. The long number is displayed when you make an outgoing call or is used for outer-

office users' direct dialing in.

Number Mapping :The number mapping is used to implement irregular number changes.

The priorities of the three number change modes are long number and short number,

number mapping, and number change in descending order. If a user meets the conditions

of the three number change modes, only the mode with the highest priority is used. If the

user has a long number, the long number is displayed on the phone of the called party.

The user who does not set the long number can use the mapping number if it is set. The

user who does not set the long number and number mapping uses the changed number.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 369/803

Number Change

modify

Insert

Delete

Number mapping

Long number and short number

The priorities of the three number change modes are long number and short number,

number mapping, and number change in descending order. If a user meets the conditions

of the three number change modes, only the mode with the highest priority is used. If the

user has a long number, the long number is displayed on the phone of the called party.

The user who does not set the long number can use the mapping number if it is set. The

user who does not set the long number and number mapping uses the changed number.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 370/803

Office route

There are direct channels between office A and office B and between office A andoffice C; therefore, both office B and office C are office routes of office A. There is

no direct channel between office A and office D; therefore, office D is not an office

route of office A.

The U1900 uses the office route number to uniquely identify an office route. For

example, the office route number from office A to office B is 1 and from office A to

office C is 2.

Sub-route

If a direct channel or an alternative channel is available between two exchange

offices, there is a sub-route between the two exchange offices. For example, there

are two sub-routes between office A and office B. Sub-route 1 is a direct sub-route

and can connect office A and office B directly without any convergence connections.

Route

A route is the group of sub-routes between two offices. A route contains one or

more sub-routes and different routes may contain the same sub-route. For example,

the route between office A and office B contains sub-routes 1 and 2 while there isonly sub-route 2 between office A and office D.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 371/803

Route policy: time-based routing, routing based on charging rate, default route.

You can configure the time segment and charge rate for each office direction (route).

The system can dynamically and intelligently sort and prioritize office directions (routes)

based on specified routing policies. The system also attempts to call peer ends one by one.

Pay attention to the following points:

You are advised to bind each office route ID to a unique office route selection code.

If multiple office route IDs are bound to the same office route selection code, all

office route records under the office route selection code are added to the routing

table on the U1981 unified gateway when you configure the route analysis function,

which may cause that the routing table becomes full.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 372/803

SS7 is a common channel signaling system that complies with international standards. It

has the following advantages: High speed transmission, Large signaling capacity, Powerful

functionality and High flexibility and reliability.SS7 meets the requirements of the Public

Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) and intelligent network (IN).

PRA refers to the control signal between terminal devices and networks. The signaling

structure is 30B+D (used in Europe and China) or 23B+D (used in North America and

Japan).

R2 is a type of channel-associated signaling. R2 was previously applicable to the

international telecommunication network and telecommunication networks in many

countries. The China No.1 (CNo.1) signaling is a type of R2. R2 consists of line signalingand register signaling. The definitions of the line signaling and register signaling, however,

vary according to the country.

The U1900 supports Session Initiation Protocol (SIP). Defined by the Internet Engineering

Task Force (IETF), SIP is a protocol at the application layer, which is used to set up, modify,

and end multimedia sessions on the IP network.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 373/803

The following transmission protocols can be used:

User Datagram Protocol (UDP) is a connectionless protocol. It provides transaction-oriented simple and unreliable information transmission. In UDP-based data

transmission, each datagram is independent and contains the source address and

destination address. This protocol, however, is unreliable, as there is no guarantee of

data delivery (including the delivery time) or integrity.

Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) is a connection-oriented protocol. In TCP-based

data transmission, a virtual channel is required between the sender and receiver.

Transport Layer Security (TLS) is a cryptographic protocol that provides

communication security between two communication application programs,

ensuring data confidentiality and integrity. When TLS is used for interconnection

between two devices, ensure that the two devices have the same user certificates,

user private keys, and root certificates.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 374/803

The difference between QSIG and PRA is the control signaling.

Clock source: The clock source is configured on one device so that the peer device cansynchronize its clock with this device. The configuration of a clock source prevents the

frame slip (voice packet loss).

If the U1900 unified gateway connects to multiple devices through E1 or T1 trunks,

configure the clock source on any of these devices. The U1981 unified gateway will

synchronize time with this device.

If the U1900 unified gateway provides the clock source, you do not need to

configure a clock source.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 375/803

First layer: The physical layer

Physical layer provides means for establishing, maintaining and releasing the physicalconnection, guarantees the information transmitted on a physical circuit. Physical

layer specification refers to electrical characteristics, physical characteristics of the

interface, including the connector specification for mechanical properties.

 Second layer: The data link layer

Link layer is on top of the physical layer provides means of establishing, maintaining

and releasing of the data link. Data link layer provides features like multiplexing flow

control, error detection and recovery, and information delivery. PRI Protocol's link

layer standard protocol is Q921.

Third layer: the network layer

Network layer provides services to complete the call control features, including

circuit-switched calls and packet-switched call control, PRI protocol standard

protocols for the network layer is Q931.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 376/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 377/803

Voice Data and Signaling Data Sent Through Different Channels: Signaling data sent by the

U1980 unified gateway must pass through a signaling transfer point (STP). The STP

transfers signaling data to the PSTN switch. Voice data sent by the U1980 unified gateway

is directly transferred to the PSTN switch through the E1 trunk. That is, voice data and

signaling data are sent through different channels.

Voice Data and Signaling Data Sent Through the Same Channel: The U1980 unified

gateway needs to negotiate with the peer device to determine whether to use the ISUP or

TUP trunk to connect to the peer device.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 378/803

An AT0 trunk is an analog circuit trunk. It uses a analog subscriber line to connect an FXO

port in the local office to an FXS port in the upper-level office to implement the dedicated

line function.

To support concurrent incoming and outgoing calls, you can apply to the local carrier for

multiple lines, and allocate a number to each line. Based on the policy for using line

resources, intra-office users are divided into DID users (that can occupy dedicated lines

exclusively) and non-DID users.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 379/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 380/803

1. AC;

2. BC.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 381/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 382/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 383/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 384/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 385/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 386/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 387/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 388/803

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 389/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 390/803

Company A headquartering in Beijing, would like to deploy a small sized IPT network so as

to realize the interconnection between inner users.

There are three types of telephone users:

IP Phone users:6000-6009;

Analog Phone users under IAD: 6100-6109;

Analog Phone users under U1900: 6200-6209.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 391/803

The first number in Status Code can define the type of response. In SIP/2.0, the first

number has six values, that is, it can define six types of responses in the following.

1xx: Information: The request has been received and it will be processed

continuously.

2xx: Success: The action has been received, understood and accepted successfully.

3xx: Redirection: Further operations are required to fulfill the call request.

4xx: Client-Error: The request has syntax errors or cannot be executed by the server.

The client should modify the request and then resend it.

5xx: Server-Error: The server cannot execute the valid request due to errors.

6xx: Global-Failure: Any server cannot execute the request.

 Among them, 1xx response is Provision response, while other responses are Final

responses.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 392/803

Analog phones are connected to specific port with analog telephone lines.

The analog phone users under IAD register to U1900 by the proxy of IAD.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 393/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 394/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 395/803

Analog phones can not be connected to U1980 directly.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 396/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 397/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 398/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 399/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 400/803

Now we are configuring the SIP(or IP Phone)Users under U1900.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 401/803

Now we are configuring the SIP(or IP Phone)Users under U1900.

IP Phone users: 6000-6009

Service rights for different user right levels:

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 402/803

Key parameter description :

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 403/803

Now we are configuring analog phone (or POTS) users under IAD. The analog phone users

under IAD register to U1900 by the proxy of IAD, so for U1900, all these users are

considered as SIP users.

Analog Phone users under IAD: 6100-6109

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 404/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 405/803

Now we are configuring analog phone (or POTS) users under U1900. The analog phones

are directly connected to the OSU or ASI board on U1900 using analog lines.

Analog Phone users under U1900: 6200-6209

Key Parameter Description

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 406/803

A call prefix is the string consisting of first few digits or all digits in called numbers. If the

called number is 1234, the call prefix can be:

First digit: 1

First two digits: 12

First three digits: 123

Entire called number: 1234

The prefix groups configured on the U196xx unified gateway constitute a called number

analysis table of the system. If the called number analysis table contains multiple prefixes

for a called number, the system uses the maximum matching rule to match the callednumber with a prefix during number analysis.

Assume that the called number is 1234 and the prefixes 1, 12, and 1234 are configured in

the called number analysis table. According to the maximum matching rule, the system

will select the prefix 1234, which is the closest to the called number. The prefixes 1 and 12

do not comply with the rule.

The basic service prefixes are classified into two types:

Intra-office prefix: used for intra-office and outer-office users to call intra-office

users. For example, if the intra-office number ranges from 7000 to 7099, you can

set the intra-office prefix to 7. When calling an intra-office user, you can simply dial

the user number such as 7001.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 407/803

Prefix 6 is configured as short number prefix: 

Config add prefix dn 6 callcategory Basic callattribute Inter cldpredeal No minlen 0maxlen 4

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 408/803

Prefix 6890 is configured as long number prefix. Parameter PSTN access should be enabled

so that the internal users are accessible for outside users in PSTN.

Config add prefix dn 6890 callcategory Basic callattribute Inter cldpredeal No

minlen 0 maxlen 8

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 409/803

Sequential: The IP phone sends registration messages to a SIP server at intervals of half of

the registration interval. If the active SIP server is fails, the IP phone registers with the

standby SIP server. If the standby SIP server fails, the IP phone registers with the local SIP

server. Services are interrupted during the SIP server switch. After the IP phone registers

with a SIP server successfully, its services become available again.

Simultaneous: The IP phone registers with the active, standby, and local SIP servers at the

same time. If the active SIP server fails, the standby SIP server takes over the services. If the

standby SIP server also fails, the local SIP server takes over the services. The switching

takes about 3s, which cannot be perceived by users. After the switching, services are

running properly.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 410/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 411/803

If the SIP users on the U1900 unified gateway use POTS phones connected to an IAD, you

must configure the connection data and allocate user numbers to ports on the IAD after

adding SIP users on the U1900 unified gateway.

If SIP users are registered with the U19xx unified gateway through the IAD, you need to

configure the IAD data to ensure the normal connection between the IAD and the U19xx

unified gateway after configuring SIP users on the U19xx unified gateway. Then allocate

the user numbers for the ports on the IAD.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 412/803

Port numbers of the IAD boards map lines with different colors. For example, the blue and

white twisted pair cable from the OSU in slot 1 of the IAD maps port 7. To view the

mapping between ports and line colors, see "Pins of the User Cable" in the IAD Product

Documentation.

Verification

After the configuration is completed, if configured user numbers can be found, users

are successfully configured; otherwise, users fail to be configured.

Troubleshooting

When a message indicating that a number exists is displayed, do not configure this

number.

When a message indicating license limitation is displayed, the number of configured

users reaches the maximum number of users supported by the license.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 413/803

1. C;

2. AB.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 414/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 415/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 416/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 417/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 418/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 419/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 420/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 421/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 422/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 423/803

As business expands, company A sets a branch in Shenzhen and the extension numbers

range from 8000 to 8009, which are also used to interconnect with users in HQ.

Meanwhile, HQ is connected with two carriers via PRA and AT0 to realize the PSTN

outgoing calls.

Requirement:

For outgoing calls, a prefix 9 should be added before each called number.

9 is local prefix;

90 is DDD prefix;

900 is IDD prefix.

The long number of calling party is displayed.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 424/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 425/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 426/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 427/803

Assume that the called number is 28970139 and the prefixes 2, 289, and 28970 are

configured in the called number analysis table. According to the maximum matching rule,

the system will select the prefix 28970, which is the closest to the called number. The

prefixes 2 and 289 do not comply with the rule.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 428/803

config add prefix

config delete prefix

config modify prefix

show prefix

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 429/803

Configure Office Route Selection Code:

[%eSpace U1900(config)]#config add office selectcode no 1 repeatroute no

If a direct channel is available between two exchange offices, either of the exchange

offices is the office route of the other exchange office.

Sub-route:

If a direct channel or an alternative channel is available between two exchange

offices, there is a sub-route between the two exchange offices. The direct channel is

the direct sub-route while the alternative channel is the alternative sub-route.

Route:

A route is the group of sub-routes between two exchange offices. A route contains

one or more sub-routes and different routes may contain the same sub-route.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 430/803

Configure Office Route

[%eSpace U1900(config)]#config add office no 1 officeselectcode 1

NOTE:

You are advised to bind each office route ID to a unique office route selection code.

If multiple office route IDs are bound to the same office route selection code, all

office route records under the office route selection code are added to the routing

table on the U1980 unified gateway when you configure the route analysis function,

which may cause that the routing table becomes full.

The Media stream encryption parameter indicates whether to encrypt RTP media

streams to ensure data security.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 431/803

Configure intra-office prefixes and outgoing prefixes for U19xx unified gateway users so

that U1900 unified gateway users (intra-office users) can make calls with each other or to

external users.

A call prefix is the string consisting of first few digits or all digits in called numbers. If the

called number is 1234, the call prefix can be:

 First digit: 1

First two digits: 12

First three digits: 123

Entire called number: 1234

The prefix groups configured on the U1980 unified gateway constitute a called number

analysis table of the system. If the called number analysis table contains multiple prefixes

for a called number, the system uses the maximum matching rule to match the called

number with a prefix during number analysis.

Assume that the called number is 1234 and the prefixes 1, 12, and 1234 are configured in

the called number analysis table. According to the maximum matching rule, the system

will select the prefix 1234, which is the closest to the called number. The prefixes 1 and 12

do not comply with the rule.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 432/803

The basic service prefixes are classified into two types:

 Intra-office prefix: used for intra-office and outer-office users to call intra-officeusers. For example, if the intra-office number ranges from 7000 to 7099, you can

set the intra-office prefix to 7. When calling an intra-office user, you can simply dial

the user number such as 7001.

Outgoing prefix: used when intra-office users make outgoing calls, such as local

calls, national toll calls, or international toll calls.

Configure inter-office short number prefix:

config add prefix dn 8 callcategory basic callattribute local cldpredeal no

officeselectcode 1 minlen 4 maxlen 4 if4pstnprefix no

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 433/803

HQ is connected to two carriers via PRA and AT0 to realize the PSTN outgoing calls.

Requirement:

For outgoing calls, a prefix 9 should be added before each called number.

9 is local prefix;

90 is DDD prefix;

900 is IDD prefix.

The long number of calling party is displayed.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 434/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 435/803

Key Parameter Description:

config add office selectcode no 2 repeatroute No

Parameter Description

Office route selectionpolicy

Policy indicating which trunk is used when multiple trunksare available between two offices.

Failure Processing Index Index that allows the standby office route selection codepolicy to be used when the active office route selectioncode policy fails.

Whether to send thetwo-stage dialing tone

Indicates whether to play the two-stage dialing tone to auser when the user dials an outgoing prefix. To play the

two-stage dialing tone, set this parameter to Yes.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 436/803

Configure office route :

config add office no 2 officeselectcode 2

NOTE:

You are advised to bind each office route ID to a unique office route selection code.

If multiple office route IDs are bound to the same office route selection code, all

office route records under the office route selection code are added to the routing

table on the U1980 unified gateway when you configure the route analysis function,

which may cause that the routing table becomes full.

The Media stream encryption parameter indicates whether to encrypt RTP media

streams to ensure data security.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 437/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 438/803

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 439/803

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 440/803

Configure DDD prefix:

[%eSpace U1900(config)]#config add prefix dn 90 callcategory basic callattributeddd cldpredeal yes cldindex 0 officeselectcode 2

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 441/803

Configure IDD prefix:

[%eSpace U1900(config)]#config add prefix dn 900 callcategory basic callattributeidd cldpredeal yes cldindex 0 officeselectcode 2

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 442/803

SS7 is a common channel signaling system that complies with international standards. It

has the following advantages: High speed transmission, Large signaling capacity, Powerful

functionality and High flexibility and reliability.

SS7 meets the requirements of the Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) and

intelligent network (IN).

PRA refers to the control signal between terminal devices and networks. The signaling

structure is 30B+D (used in Europe and China) or 23B+D (used in North America and

Japan).

R2 is a type of channel-associated signaling. R2 was previously applicable to the

international telecommunication network and telecommunication networks in many

countries. The China No.1 (CNo.1) signaling is a type of R2. R2 consists of line signaling

and register signaling. The definitions of the line signaling and register signaling, however,

vary according to the country.

The U1900 supports Session Initiation Protocol (SIP).

Defined by the Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF), SIP is a protocol at the

application layer, which is used to set up, modify, and end multimedia sessions on

the IP network.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 443/803

The following transmission protocols can be used for U1900 unified gateway.

Protocol Description Local Port

UDP

A connectionless transport layer protocolthat provides a simple but unreliabletransaction-oriented informationtransmission service. UDP features lessresource consumption and higherprocessing speed, but does not guaranteethat data packets can be sent to thedestination safely and completely.

5060 (mandatory)

TCP

A connection-oriented, reliable IP-based

transport layer protocol. The processingspeed of TCP is lower than that of UDP, butTCP supports retransmission of lost packetsand data verification to ensure that datapackets can be sent to the destination safelyand completely.

5061 (recommended)

TLS

A cryptographic protocol that providescommunication security between twocommunication application programs,ensuring data confidentiality and integrity.

5062 or 5063(recommended)

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 444/803

Set peer device domain name to U1911, IP address to 10.77.194.45, and number of calls

that a trunk can bear to 20.

config add peercomponent domainname U1911 ip 10.77.194.45 tkcnum 20

Set the office route number to 1, peer device domain name to U1911,the peer port of sip

protocol to 5060, and number of calls that a trunk can bear to 20.

config protocol sip officeno 1 domainname U1911 peerport 5060 maxcallnum 20

Key parameters

Parameter Description

Domainname of thepeer device

Domain name that uniquely identifies a peer device. This parameter ismandatory, and the domain name must be unique.

Transmissionprotocol type

There are four types: UDP, TCP. TLSServer and TLSClient.NOTE: If you want to encrypt signaling using TLS, configure thecommunication parties as TLSServer and TLSClient respectively.

Select officeroute number

ID of the office route that a SIP trunk belongs to.

Maximum

number ofrestrictedcalls

Maximum number of calls on a SIP trunk. If the number of incoming

and outgoing calls routed through a SIP trunk exceeds the maximumnumber, the system automatically rejects new calls.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 445/803

ISDN User / network interface in a large number of interface solutions. Uses two types of

interfaces.

BRI: Basic Rate Interface, ie 2B + D and B are the 64kbps rate of the digital channel,

D is 16kbps digital channel.

PRI: Primary Rate Interface, 30B + D or 23B + D, B and D are 64kbps digital channel.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 446/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 447/803

Insert an MTU to slot 2, set the office route number to 2, and set the signaling type to

PRA:

config add board slot 2 type mtu officeno 2

Add a PRA link. Set the link number to 0, slot number to 2, E1 port number to 1. Set the

link position to user. This parameter must be set through negotiations with the peer

device.

config add pralink linkno 0 slot 2 trunkport 1 position user

Configure the clock source:

config system clocksource primaryslot 2 primarye1 1

Parameter Description

Position Position in a PRA link. The options are User Side and Network Side.

LinkTimeslot

Circuit ID of a link, which specifies the timeslot in the E1 or T1 link of aPRA trunk.When E1 is used, this parameter can be set only to 16.When T1 is used, the value of this parameter is an integer ranging from 1to 24.

CRC CRC is a data verification mechanism. The values of the local office andpeer office must be the same. If the peer office enables the CRC, set thisparameter to Yes.

Whether to Indicates whether to play an announcement based on the returned cause

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 448/803

The clock source is configured on one device so that the peer device can synchronize its

clock with this device. The configuration of a clock source prevents the frame slip (voice

packet loss).

If the U1900 unified gateway connects to multiple devices through E1 or T1 trunks,

configure the clock source on any of these devices. The U1900 unified gateway will

synchronize time with this device.

If the U1900 unified gateway provides the clock source, you do not need to

configure a clock source.

Parameter Description

Select clocksource

Select Local device if the local device is used as the clock source. SelectPeer device and configure the clock source if the clock of the peer deviceis used as the clock source.

Active clockslot No

Slot of the board that uses the QSIG trunk for interconnection.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 449/803

An AT0 trunk is an analog circuit trunk. It uses a analog subscriber line to connect an FXO

port in the local office to an FXS port in the upper-level office to implement the dedicated

line function.

To support concurrent incoming and outgoing calls, you can apply to the local carrier for

multiple lines, and allocate a number to each line. Based on the policy for using line

resources, intra-office users are divided into DID users (that can occupy dedicated lines

exclusively) and non-DID users.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 450/803

The requirement:

Configure DDI(Direct Dial-In), to bind the DDI user with a specific AT0 line.

Configure the incoming call to transfer to Switch Board by default. Non-DDI calls will

be transferred to a preset number which is usually Switch Board number.

The calling party can dial the PSTN number corresponding to a dedicated line to directly

call a DID user, or dial PSTN numbers corresponding to other lines to call any intra-office

users through the automatic switchboard.

When a DID user makes an outgoing call, the call must be routed through the dedicated

line of the user. When a non-DID user makes an outgoing call, the system selects a line

from other lines to route the call based on the line selection rule.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 451/803

1. A;

2. B.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 452/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 453/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 454/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 455/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 456/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 457/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 458/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 459/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 460/803

Outgoing call;

Display the long number of caller;

The caller without long number shows switchboard number 68908888;

Delete the first digit “9” of the called number.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 461/803

If a user meets the conditions of the three number change modes, only the mode with the

highest priority is used.

If the user has a long number, the long number is displayed on the phone of the

called party.

The user who does not set the long number can use the mapping number if it is set.

The user who does not set the long number and number mapping uses the changed

number.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 462/803

Configure long number & short number:

Config add subscriber eid 6000 dn 6000 longdn 68906000 Dnstep 1 number 10

A user has two numbers: a short number and a long number allocated by the PSTN. The

short number is used for the calls between intra-office users. The long number is displayed

when you make an outgoing call or is used for outer-office users' direct dialing in.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 463/803

Configure prefix 6890 for long number so that outer-office users can directly dial in.

Config add prefix dn 6890 callcategory Basic callattribute Inter cldpredeal Nouselongcli Yes If4pstnprefix Yes

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 464/803

Configure prefix 9. If the user who dials prefix 9 has a long number, the long number is

displayed on the phone of the called user.

Similarly, when configuring DDD prefix 90 and IDD prefix 900, “display long calling

number”need to be set as yes.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 465/803

Configure number mapping:

Config add numbermap innernum 6010 externnum 68906543

The number mapping is used to implement irregular number conversion.

Procedure

Login on to the U1960 web configuration page.

Choose Trunk > Office Route Configuration.

Click Number mapping.

Click Create. Configure the number mapping for user 6010.

Key parameters:

Parameter Description

Internal number Short number used in an intra-office call.

External number Long number allocated by the carrier.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 466/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 467/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 468/803

Index 0: The first digit of the number is deleted.

Index 1: The entire number is changed to 68908888.

Index 2: The prefix 5 is added to the number.

Number change method that specifies the way that the system uses to change the

calling or called numbers. The options are as follows: Change Number Change a

specified string in the original number.

Delete Number Delete a specified string from the original number.

Insert Number Add a string to a specified position in the original number.

Insert by Length Add a string to a specified position in the original number based on

the number length.

Change by Length Change a specified string in the original number based on the

number length.

Delete by Length Delete a specified string from the original number based on the

number length.

Insert by Call Source If a number is within a specified call source, prefix the area

code of the call source to the number.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 469/803

Key parameter description:

Parameter Description

Number changeindex

Unique index of a number change rule.

Change type •Number change method that specifies the way that the system uses tochange the calling or called numbers. The options are as follows: ChangeNumber Change a specified string in the original number.

•Delete Number Delete a specified string from the original number.

•Insert Number Add a string to a specified position in the original number.

•Insert by Length Add a string to a specified position in the original numberbased on the number length.

•Change by Length Change a specified string in the original number basedon the number length.

•Delete by Length Delete a specified string from the original number basedon the number length.

Number length Original number length. For example, if the original number is 9999, thenumber length is 4.

Starting position Position from which the number change begins. This parameter specifies theposition to change some digits in, add digits to, or delete digits from anoriginal called or calling number. Digits are changed from the left in theoriginal number, and the first position code is 0.

New number New number after the number change or inserted number.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 470/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 471/803

1. BC。 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 472/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 473/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 474/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 475/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 476/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 477/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 478/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 479/803

The intelligent routing service automatically selects office routes when an IP trunk or a

TDM trunk is faulty, and provides routing polices to increase communication reliability and

minimize communication costs.

The intelligent routing service includes:

Routing by time segment: Different time indexes are set for different office routes.

Each time index corresponds to a specified time segment (accurate to hour). Based

on the current time, the IP PBX searches for the time index for an outgoing call and

selects the related office route.

The IP PBX allows multiple office route selection codes to share one office route.

When an office route is added to multiple office route selection codes, multiple

routing policies apply to the office route. The IP PBX automatically selects the

routing policy based on the outgoing prefix that a user dials.

Routing by charge rate Different charge rate reference values are set for different

office routes. The IP PBX preferentially selects the office route with the lowest

charge rate reference value for outgoing calls. If all trunk circuits are busy for this

office route, the IP PBX selects the office route with the second lowest charge rate

reference value.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 480/803

Rerouting upon a routing failure:When a call fails to be routed based on the office

route selection code, the IP PBX selects a new route based on the standby office

route selection code corresponding to the failure processing index.

Route load balancing :The IP PBX balances traffic among multiple preset routes.

The IP PBX elects office routes based on office route IDs in ascending order till an

office route that contains idle circuits is found. The later calls will elect from the next

office route after an office route is selected by the preceding call.

Routing by percentage :Different percentages are set for different office routes.

The IP PBX selects office routes in turn based on the preset percentages. Except the

office routes whose percentages are set to 100%, office routes are polled based on

preset percentages in descending order.

Routing by user right level :Different office routes are set for different user right

levels. When a higher-right-level user makes an outgoing call, the IP PBX

preferentially selects the office route that is set for the user right level. If selecting

the office route fails, the IP PBX selects the office route that is set for a lower user

right level.

When routing by user right level is used, the IP PBX preferentially uses an office

route at the user right level to route calls. If no circuit is idle, the office route that is

set for a lower user right level is used. Office routes that are set for the same level

are elected based on office route IDs in ascending order. To ensure good voice

quality of calls for higher-right-level users, these users are allocated with high-

performance office routes. Lower-right-level users, however, are not allowed to use

these office routes.

Trunk link balancing The IP PBX preferentially selects a trunk with more idle circuits

to balance loads among available trunk links.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 481/803

When the call fails to be routed based on the office route selection code, select a new

route based on the standby office route selection code corresponding to the failure

processing index.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 482/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 483/803

Parameter description:

Parameter DescriptionFailure Processing Index Unique index of a failure processing policy.

Rerouting policy upon failure Failure selection policy used by a failure processing index.

Selection node of Standbyoffice route

Office route selection policy used for rerouting.

Called number change Indicates whether to change the called number after rerouting.

Calling number change Indicates whether to change the calling number after rerouting.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 484/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 485/803

Policy for selecting among office routes with the same office route selection code. The

options are as follows:

None : Office routes are polled based on office route IDs in ascending order until an

office route that contains idle circuits is found.

By Time : Office routes are polled based on office route IDs in ascending order until

an office route that is valid at the current system time and contains idle circuits is

found.

By Charging Rate: Office routes are polled based on charging rates in ascending

order until an office route that contains idle circuits is found. Office routes with the

same charging rate are polled based on office route IDs in ascending order. If no idle

circuit is found, office routes configured with no charge rate are polled based on

office route IDs in ascending order until an office route that contains idle circuits is

found.

By Load Sharing : Office routes are polled based on office route IDs in ascending

order until an office route that contains idle circuits is found. The later calls will poll

office routes from the next office route after an office route is selected by the

preceding call.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 486/803

By Load Sharing Percentage: Except the office routes whose load percentages are

set to 100%, office routes are polled based on the load percentages in descending

order.

User Level : Office routes are polled based on user priorities in ascending order until

an office route that contains idle circuits and has an equal or lower user priority is

found. Office routes with the same charging rate are polled based on office route

IDs in ascending order.

Load Balancing: Office routes are polled based on office route IDs in ascending

order until an office route that contains the maximum number of idle circuits is

found.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 487/803

The U1900 polls office routes based on the office route ID in ascending order until an

office route that contains idle circuits is found. Subsequent calls will poll from the next

office route after the office route that is selected by the preceding call.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 488/803

Configure office route selection policy

config add office selectcode no 1 repeatroute no selecttype loadshare

Configure the office route selection code.

Set the office route selection code to 1. Office route selection code 1 selects office

routes based on load balancing.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 489/803

Configure the office route

Office route 0 is used for the PRA trunk, with office route selection code being 1

Office route 1 is used for the ISUP trunk, with office route selection code being 1

Configure office route

config add office no 0 officeselectcode 1

config add office no 1 officeselectcode 1

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 490/803

1. C.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 491/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 492/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 493/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 494/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 495/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 496/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 497/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 498/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 499/803

This feature applies to UC terminals of all types.

IVR processes and announcements can be customized. A maximum of 10 levels of IVRmenus are supported. The keys for repeatedly listening to an IVR menu and for forwarding

a call to a voice mailbox are configurable. Different announcements can be played within

different time segments.

The U1900 series unified gateway supports a maximum of 256 automatic switchboards

and 245 customized scripts. A maximum of 246 notifications can be recorded. Among

these notifications, one is for the default automatic switchboard, and the other 245 are for

the customized automatic switchboard. Each customized switchboard can have one

notification. The maximum duration for a single IVR file is:

U1981/U1960/U1911: 300 seconds

U1980/U1930/U1910: 32 seconds

NOTE:

For a U1980/U1930/U1910 unified gateway, you can load custom announcements

only by uploading the voice.zip  file, instead of using the web system to record

custom announcements or using an IP phone to record custom announcements or

notifications.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 500/803

Typical Scenario of the VU Service

After the automatic switchboard is configured, outer-office users hear "Thanks forcalling XX. Please dial the extension number. For the agent service, dial 0."when

dialing the automatic switchboard number.The customer dials 0 for the agent

service. The customer dials an extension number to reach the desired enterprise

user.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 501/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 502/803

Generally, the unified gateway at the central node plays the welcome announcement and

IVR menus for the calling party who makes calls to the automatic switchboard. In the

centralized network scenario, if a branch deploys a local node, the administrator can

configure the local node to play announcements and collect digits for the switchboard.

This helps save the bandwidth from the central node to the local node. When a PSTN user

connects to the automatic switchboard from the local node, the local node plays the

switchboard announcements and collects digits for the switchboard

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 503/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 504/803

Prerequisites

Numbers have been allocated to intra-office users on the unified gateway.

The trunk that connects to other devices has been configured.

When an external user dials the automatic switchboard number, the user hears the

announcement "Please dial the extension number." The user enters the extension number.

Then, the call is routed to the user inside the enterprise.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 505/803

VU scripts of the automatic switchboard have been pre-configured into the system by

default. Users can configure the automatic switchboard access code to enable automatic

switchboard functions.

Use an administrator account to log in to the web management system of a U1900 series

unified gateway.

Configure an automatic switchboard access code.

Choose Trunk Management > Prefix Configuration.

Click Create.

Configure prefix 28887888.

NOTE:

The automatic switchboard access code (28887888 in this example) must be

different from user numbers. If the automatic switchboard access code is the same

as a user number, the call to the number is routed to the user, not the switchboard.

Key parameters:

VU loop Whether the switchboard prompt tone is

returned again when the switchboard cannot be called

VU outgoing right Whether the switchboard can forward calls to

external extensions. To prevent intra-office users from dialing the switchboard to

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 506/803

Recording and loading a single voice file: using an IP phone to record

For U1911/U1960/U1981, if you do not have a high requirement on the audioquality and need to modify custom announcements frequently, you can use a phone

to record custom announcements in real time. Recorded custom announcements

will be automatically loaded to the unified gateway.

A user can dial the automatic switchboard number and the recording prefix to

record a notification. After a notification is recorded, it is played prior to the

automatic switchboard announcement when a user dials the automatic switchboard

number.

Recording and loading a single voice file: using dedicated recording software to record

When U1911/U1960/U1981 is used, it is recommended that dedicated recording

software be used to record voice files if you have a high requirement on the audio

quality and the voice files seldom change.

Customizing and loading multiple voice files

U1911/U1960/U1981/U1980/U1930/U1910 allows you to upload a package to

replace customized voice files. For U1980/U1930/U1910, you must this method to

load voice files.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 507/803

The audio files must meet the following requirements. If the format is incorrect, audio files

cannot be played.

The codec is G.711a.

The announcement recorded is in mono.pcm or .wav format.

The sampling rate is 8 kHz, and the sample precision is 8 bits.

The duration does not exceed 5 minutes, and the size does not exceed 2.5 MB.

Audio files must be named after voice channel ID, for example, 252.pcm.

The length of the audio file name plus suffix name cannot exceed 128 bytes.

Otherwise, an error will occur when loading audio files through the web

management system.

After being loaded, custom announcements are stored in the SD card of the SCUB. Every

time the MTUB restarts or a new MTUB is added, the MTUB reads all custom

announcements from the SD card of the SCUB, The synchronization process takes about 1

minute and the announcements take effect immediately.

Custom announcements can be loaded only if SCUB boards exist on the unified gateway

and SD cards can be inserted into the SCUB boards.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 508/803

NOTE:

Custom announcements can also be packaged into voice.zip, but the format andsize of audio files for custom announcements must meet the format and size

requirements on default announcements.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 509/803

Loading Audio Files

Use an administrator account to log in to the web management system of a U1900series unified gateway.

Choose System > Voice File Management.

Click Create to add a voice file and click OK.

Verification

Dial #79*N# as a user who has the agent rights to verify that the announcement for

voice channel N  is the recorded custom announcement. An agent can hear the

announcements for all voice channels.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 510/803

(Optional) Configuring the Time Segment Index

The system supports period-specific automatic switchboard for playing differentannouncements at different time segments. Skip this section if period-specific

automatic switchboard is not required.

Use an administrator account to log in to the web management system of a U1900

series unified gateway.

Choose System > VU Management > Time index.

NOTE:

Do not create two time segment policies that have the same time segment. If suchpolicies exist, announcement may encounter exceptions if users dial the

corresponding automatic switchboard number within that time segment.

If two time segments overlap, the automatic switchboard corresponding to holidays

is preferentially used among all the overlapping time segments. If the overlapping

time segments all belong to holidays or all do not belong to holidays, the automatic

switchboard corresponding to the time segment that has a smallest index is

preferentially used.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 511/803

Use an administrator account to log in to the web management system of a U1900 series

unified gateway.

Choose System > VU Management > Customized automatic switchboard Configuration.

Click Create.

If the automatic switchboard is not required to play announcements by time segment, you

only need to set the first time segment. Set the values of the other Time segment fields

to none.

If multi-level voice menus are not required, you do not need to click Create menu to setrelated parameters.

By default, the system allows users to press * to return to the previous menu and press #

to return to the root menu. No additional configuration is required.

Several automatic switchboard can share one console.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 512/803

 Parameter Description

Script name Name of the script that is generated after the automatic switchboard is configured. The

script name is user-defined. The script can be downloaded so that it can be load to

another automatic switchboard to implement the same functions as this automatic

switchboard.

Extension number

length

Maximum length of an extension number when a call is forwarded from the automatic

switchboard to an extension.

Inter-digit timeout

time

Interval between two dialing attempts. If the interval between a user's two conseutive

dialing attempts reaches this duration or if the user performs no operation within this

duration after the system plays an announcement, the system determines that the

dialing ends or the operation times out.

Play voice interval Duration after which the system determines a dialing timeout and plays an

announcement again because no operation is performed within this duration. If no digit

is dialed when the number of times the system plays the announcement reaches the

value of Play count, the system releases the call.

Prefixed number Number that the system automatically prefixes to an extension number when a user

dials the automatic switchboard number and an extension number.

Generally, you do not need to specify this number. If required in some scenarios, set

this parameter based on the data plan.

Time segment Time segment used to specify the announcements and IVR menus to be played. The

time segments are set on the Time index tab page.

The default value is none, indicating all time segments.

Welcome voice Number of the voice channel for the welcome announcement that is played when a call

is made to the automatic switchboard in the specified time segment.

Menu voice Voice menus to be played after the welcome announcement is played. For example, toquery numbers, please dial 0. To query services, please dial 1. To switch to the manual

service, please dial 9.

Voice menus can be recorded separately from or together with the welcome

announcement. If you have recorded voice menus together with the welcome

announcement, set this parameter to none.

Extension not

support

Extension support

•Extension support. A user can directly dial the extension number of an intra-office user

to reach this user after hearing the corresponding announcement.

•Extension not support. A user can only dial a menu code to access a lower-level menu

after hearing the corresponding announcement.

Play count Times an announcement is replayed upon an incorrect user input.

Create menu Click to create a lower-level menu.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 513/803

 Parameter Description

Description of menu items •0 –9, *, #, T/O, Failure transferred. When configuring submenu processes for

an automatic switchboard, define the system response process when a user

presses a single key (digits from 0 to 9, *, or #) and define the system response

process upon situations such as a user operation timeout or a call transferfailure.

•NOTE:By default, the system allows users to press * to return to the previous

menu and press # to return to the root menu. If you have redefined the

functions for the two keys in the submenus, the new definitions take effect.

•Switch to assigned number. After a user presses this key, the system forwards

a call to a preset number, for example, a SoftConsole access number or a

manual service number.

•Play voice. When a user presses this key, the system plays the announcement

corresponding to a specified channel number, for example, the introduction to

an enterprise.

•Switch to voice mailbox. When a user presses this key, the system forwards a

call to a voice mailbox.• If this parameter is empty, the system plays an announcement

notifying that the user is being redirected to a process for

leaving a voice message and prompts the user to enter the user

number to which a voice message is left. Then the user enters

the process for leaving a voice message.

• If a user number for a public voice mailbox is entered, the

system plays an announcement notifying that the user is being

redirected to a process for leaving a voice message and then

directly enters the process.

•Before setting this parameter, configure the voice mailbox service and ensure

that the voice mailbox permission has been granted to related users.

•Get voice message. When a user presses this key, a call is forwarded to a

preset voice mailbox access prefix. Then the user enters the process for

retrieving voice messages. The user can retrieve voice messages as prompted.

•Before setting this parameter, configure the voice mailbox service and ensure

that the voice mailbox permission has been granted to related users.

•Switch to sub menu. Select this option if you need to create sub menus. You

can also specify the channel numbers for playing sub menu announcements to

notify users of the sub menus.

•Before setting this parameter, configure the voice mailbox.

•Go back to previous menu. When a user presses this key, the system plays the

announcement for returning to the previous menu.

Replay the menu voice. When a user presses this key, the system repeatedlyplays the announcement for a menu.

•Transfer calls to the extension. When a user presses this key, the system

allows the user to dial an extension number.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 514/803

click an icon in the Operation column next to a script name to modify or download a script

file. The downloaded script file can be uploaded to this device or another device.

NOTE:

The following takes a .cfg script file that is customized on the web management

system for an automatic switchboard as an example. The script files that you upload

or download on the Script Management page are all service VU and IVR script files

supported by the system, for example, the script file for the VMS. The script files are

in .txt format.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 515/803

Use an administrator account to log in to the web management system of a U1900 series

unified gateway.

Choose Trunk Management > Prefix Configuration.

Click Create.

NOTE:

The access code (28887888 in this example) must be different from user numbers. If

the access code is the same as a user number, the call to the number is routed to

the user, not the switchboard

Verification

Verify the period-specific automatic switchboard service configuration by dialing the

automatic switchboard number.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 516/803

The system will play the automatic switchboard prompt tone when a user fails to call

someone by dialing an extension number through the switchboard.

Use an administrator account to log in to the web management system of a U1900

series unified gateway.

Choose Trunk > Prefix Configuration.

Create the automatic switchboard prefix and set VU cyclic parameters.

Verification

Make a call to the automatic switchboard. Pick up the phone and dial automatic

switchboard number 28887888. The call is connected and the announcement"Please dial the extension number" is played.

Make a call to an extension number. Dial an extension number 81000 as

prompted. The call fails and the announcement "Please dial the extension

number" is played.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 517/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 518/803

Verification

Make a call to an extension number. Pick up the phone and dial 2888788881000.The call is connected.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 519/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 520/803

1. B.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 521/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 522/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 523/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 524/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 525/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 526/803

Upon completion of this course, you will be able to:

Understand the voice mailbox function.

Understand the Huawei voice mailbox features.

Master the basic service configuration of VMS.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 527/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 528/803

U1980 can not support the Built-in Voice Mailbox Services function.

The voice mailbox feature requires the corresponding license, and the number ofconcurrent messages is limited by the license.

Built-in voice mailbox specifications

ModelMaximum Number of Voice Mailbox Users

Maximum Number ofConcurrent Messages

U1911 100 12

U1960 1000 30

U1981 1200 30

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 529/803

Users can leave, retrieve, delete, and play voice messages and customize greetings. If a

phone has a message indicator, the indicator turns on when a voice message is received.

Voice mailbox services include call transfer to voice mailbox unconditional (CTVMU), call

transfer to voice mailbox on no reply (CTVMNR), call transfer to voice mailbox on busy

(CTVMB), call transfer to voice mailbox offline (CTVMO).

Call transfer to voice mailbox unconditional (CTVMU) service: A service that allows all the

calls to a registered user to be forwarded to the UMS unconditionally. Then, the caller can

leave messages according to prompts.

Call transfer to voice mailbox on no reply (CTVMNR) service: A service that allows a call to

a registered user to be forwarded automatically to the UMS if this user does not answer

the call within 20 seconds. Then, the caller can leave messages according to prompts.

Call transfer to voice message on busy (CTVMB) service: A service that allows a call to a

registered user to be forwarded automatically to the UMS if this user is busy. Then, the

caller can leave messages according to prompts.

Call transfer to voice mailbox offline (CTVMO: If a user activates the call transfer to voice

mailbox on offline (CTVMO) service, incoming calls are transferred to the user's voice

mailbox if the user is offline. Calling parties can leave voice messages as prompted.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 530/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 531/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 532/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 533/803

NOTE:

The value of Number of VMS Channels refers to the maximum number of calls thatcan be processed at a time for the voice mailbox services, and must be set based on

the license information obtained in last step.

On each MTU board, the value of Number of VMS Channels must be the same as

the value of Voice Mail nums in the license.

The concurrent VMS channel is limited by the U1900 license, the SD card in MTU

board is just used to store the voice data.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 534/803

Verify the number of SD cards.

Messages in the voice mailbox service are stored in the SD card of the MTU. Onlyone SD card can be installed on each MTU board, and the SD card must be installed

in slot SD0. The storage space required for voice messages can be calculated with

the following formula: Storage space required for voice messages = [Size of PCM-

encoded voice data per second (8 KB) x Maximum duration of a voice message

(120s) + File header and index (0.1 KB)] x Maximum number of voice messages for a

user (20) x Number of users. According to this formula, an 8 GB space can support

the voice mailbox service for about 430 users.

Note:

Information, such as the total space of the SD card, available space of the SD

card, and number of voice messages for intra-office users, can be viewed on

the User > VMS Statistics page of the web management system.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 535/803

NOTE:

 If the scripts do not exist, load the corresponding script. Generally, it is unnecessaryto modify the preloaded VMS script. In case of any special situations, for example,

when the script is deleted, reload the script. When reloading the script, select the

VU type.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 536/803

The scripts are already loaded by default.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 537/803

Voice message: Used to record voice messages.

VMS access code: Used to retrieve voice messages and customize personal greetings.

Access the web management system, and choose Trunk > Prefix Configuration.

Click Create, and set the prefix for leaving voice messages and VMS access code.

NOTE:

You can also run the config add prefix dn dn callcategory vu callattribute

<vuvmsleavemsg | vuvmsaccesscode> cldpredeal no command to create a voice

message prefix and a VMS unified access prefix, but do not

set ifshareprefix to yes (default value: no).

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 538/803

Voice message: Used to record voice messages.

VMS access code: Used to retrieve voice messages and customize personal greetings.

Access the web management system, and choose Trunk > Prefix Configuration.

Click Create, and set the prefix for leaving voice messages and VMS access code.

NOTE:

You can also run the config add prefix dn dn callcategory vu callattribute

<vuvmsleavemsg | vuvmsaccesscode> cldpredeal no command to create a voice

message prefix and a VMS unified access prefix, but do not

set ifshareprefix to yes (default value: no).

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 539/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 540/803

Access the web management system, and choose User > SIP User.(For a POTS user, choose

User > POTS User.)

Find and select the user number for which you want to enable voice mailbox services and

click Service Configuration.

Under Complex service, click Configure next to Forwarding service.

In the window that is displayed, find the call transfer type to be enabled, and set the

parameters

NOTE:

After a type of call transfer to voice mailbox service is enabled for a user, the usermust activate the service for it to take effect.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 541/803

 

Parameter Description

Priority

Order of priorities for call forwarding to phone number andcall forwarding to voice mailbox. If these two services are bothenabled for a user, the selected call forwarding mode prevails.NOTE:Users can log in to the self-service portal to adjust thepriorities of their call forwarding services.

Voicemailbox

RightIndicates whether to enable the call forwarding to voice mailboxservice permission of the corresponding type.

Voicemailboxnumber

Number of the voice mailbox created for storing voicemessages.

Service

Indicates whether to register the voice mailbox service of thecorresponding type for the user. You may not register theservice for the user here. Users can register the servicesthemselves.

Wait timeWaiting time threshold, crossing which the call forwarding onno reply service is triggered. This parameter is available only forcall forwarding to phone number on no reply.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 542/803

CTVMU : Call transfer to voice mailbox unconditional

CTVMNR : Call transfer to voice mailbox on no reply

CTVMB : Call transfer to voice mailbox on busy

CTVMO : Call transfer to voice mailbox offline

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 543/803

The preset prefix for directly leaving voice messages is *23*. If you need to customize the

prefix base on the user habit, you can create a prefix for directly leaving voice messages as

follows: 

Access the web management system, and choose Trunk > Prefix Configuration.

Click Create, and create prefix 91003 for directly leaving voice messages.

NOTE:

You can also run the config add prefix dn dn callcategory new callattribute

leavemsgdirect cldpredeal no command to create a direct message prefix, but do

not set ifshareprefix to yes (default value: no).

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 544/803

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 545/803

Activating or Deactivating the Service

If the service is not activated when the voice mailbox service permission is assigned to auser, the user must activate the service for the service permission to take effect. The

service can be activated or deactivated in either of the following ways:

Method 1: Activate or deactivate the service in the web self-service system.

Log in to the web self-service system.

Choose Self-serviceServiceForwarding service.

Set the service priority, activate or deactivate the service, and click OK.

Method 2: Dial a prefix for activating or deactivating the service on an IP phone.

Service Type Prefix for Activating theService

Prefix for Deactivating theService

CTVMU *91# #91#

CTVMNR *93# #93#

CTVMB *92# #92#

CTVMO *98# #98#

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 546/803

When entering identity verification information,

Intra-office users need to enter only the password. The intra-office users can alsopress the star key (*) to retrieve voice messages for others.

Outer-office users need to enter the voice mailbox user number and password.

When the system is playing a voice message, users can press any button to stop playing

the voice message.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 547/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 548/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 549/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 550/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 551/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 552/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 553/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 554/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 555/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 556/803

Inter: intra-office call.

Local: local call.

DDD: national toll call.

IDD: international toll call.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 557/803

Deploy an U1900 series gateway and connect to an PSTN network.

An internal user 6000, can call an internal number 6001, also can call a local operator’s number 28562933. This user cannot make a toll call.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 558/803

A call prefix is the string consisting of first few digits or all digits in called numbers.

Intra-office prefix: used for intra-office and outer-office users to call intra-office users. Forexample, if the intra-office number ranges from 7000 to 7099, you can set the intra-office

prefix to 7. When calling an intra-office user, you can simply dial the user number such as

7001.

Outgoing prefix: used when intra-office users make outgoing calls, such as local calls,

national toll calls, or international toll calls.

Configure the prefix:

Log in to the web management system.

Choose Trunk > Prefix Configuration and click Create.

Configure a prefix in the Create Prefix dialog box

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 559/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 560/803

Users at different right levels have different rights to make calls. Call rights can be control

by time segment so that users at a level can make calls only in a specified time segment.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 561/803

Different levels have different new service rights. The service rights of lower-level users are

the sub rights of the service rights of higher-level users.

If trunks are insufficient, reserved trunks can be used based on the preset user level.

If there is no available reserved trunk, higher-right-level users who make outgoing calls can

preempt the trunks assigned for lower-right-level users. For example, a user at the super

level can preempt trunks occupied by users at the advanced, normal, and default levels.

When the trunk of a lower-right-level user is preempted, the user hears the busy tone

(configurable), and the call is released.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 562/803

Log in to the LMT and access the command tree.

Choose System Management > System Information from the command tree. Double-clickConfig Set Workingtime.

Enable and set the specific period.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 563/803

Log in to the LMT and access the command tree

Set the PriorLevel.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 564/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 565/803

The 32-level right is a customized right. When used with call prefixes, the 32-level right

can prevent specified users from making calls.

The blacklist and whitelist call restriction allows you to accept or reject specified calls.

VoIP domain call restriction is a call restriction policy for SIP users and SIP trunks. Using

this policy, the number of calls for each VoIP domain is restricted for bandwidth control.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 566/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 567/803

9 is the local prefix.

User 6000 and 6001 are the default level, but they have different call rights.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 568/803

Configure an outgoing prefix.

config modify prefix dn 9 callcategory basic callattribute local cusattribute cus1

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 569/803

Login the web interface for the configuration.

Choose SIP User > User, choose a number you want to set, then click ServiceConfiguration.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 570/803

Choose Outgoing call right, click Configure.

Chosse Custom 1.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 571/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 572/803

System blacklist and whitelist

The U1900 series unified gateway adds users to different call barring groups tocontrol call rights.Call restriction groups include: blacklist, whitelist, and common

call barring groups. Users are added to the common call barring group by default.

The administrator can add users to other groups based on actual needs

Personal blacklist

Users can configure their own blacklists to filter out unwanted calls. A blacklisted

user will hear a call barring prompt tone.

The priority of personal blacklists is lower than that of system blacklists and

whitelists.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 573/803

The blacklist and whitelist call restriction allows you to accept or reject specified calls.

If the blacklist and whitelist are not configured, the default value is Ordinary.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 574/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 575/803

Add number 9168 to the called party blacklist.

config add blackandwhite dn 9168 calltype callee grouptype blackgroup

Add number 6002 to the calling party whitelist.

config add blackandwhite dn 6002 calltype caller grouptype whitegroup

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 576/803

U1900 Blacklist and whitelist specifications

Item U1910/U1911 U1930/U1960 U1980/U1981

Maximum number of users in

a system blacklist or whitelist

Maximum number of users/2

Maximum number of a

personal blacklist

1000 2500 10000

Maximum of blacklists

configured by a user

10

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 577/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 578/803

A PIN code is a call restriction service password assigned to some users. Common users are

allowed to dial the numbers with certain prefixes depending on the call rights assigned to

the phone numbers they use, while users with PIN codes can dial more numbers within the

PIN-Code service rights. CDRs generated for calls with PIN code authentication record the

user accounts, calling numbers and called numbers corresponding to a PIN code.

After a user picks up an IP phone with the PIN-Code service right enabled and dials a

number:

If the called number prefix is required to have call right authentication, the user

needs to enter the PIN code according to the announcements and make a call based

on the PIN-Code service right.

If the called number prefix is not required to have call right authentication, the user

can directly make a call based on the call rights assigned to the phone number.

NOTE:

The PIN-Code service cannot coexist with the password-based call barring service or

the simple card number service. You can run the show pwdcalllimit command to

query whether the password-based call barring service and the simple card number

service are enabled.

Keep PIN codes secure to avoid unnecessary charge caused by unauthorized use of

the PIN codes.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 579/803

The administrator in an enterprise enables the PIN-Code-based call barring service for an

international toll call prefix (for example, 900) on all phones.

To enable the boss to make international toll calls, the administrator configures call barring

accounts and PIN codes for the boss.

Other users can make intra-office, local, and domestic calls, but cannot make international

toll calls starting with 900.

The boss can enter the PIN codes on any phone to make international toll calls through the

IVR dialing mode. User numbers and call barring accounts used to dial phone numbers are

written into call records, which can be checked by the administrator.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 580/803

Prerequisite:Log in to the device using the LMT. Choose Command Delivery > Script

Load  to run the PIN-code-based call barring service script.

PIN-Code Call Restriction Configuration Process: 

1. Enable the PIN-Code service;

2. Create a PIN code;

3. Enable the service for IP phone user;

4. Configure prefix;

5. Save. 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 581/803

Configuration:

1. Choose User > Global Service > Call Restriction.

2. On the Call restriction type, select Pin-Code and click OK to enable the Pin-Code call

barring service.

3. Click Create and create a PIN-code account and password.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 582/803

A user can use this account and password to make calls based on the call permission. For

example, you can configure a PIN-code account for making international toll calls.

Configuration:

1. Configure an account and password.

2. Set the Outgoing call rights as “International toll call”.

3. Click “OK”.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 583/803

You can add the service permission for users in a batch. Users with PIN-code accounts and

passwords can use the PIN-code-based call barring service on any phones with the service

permission enabled.

Configuration:

1. Choose User > SIP User or User > POTS User.

2. Choose the number for which you want to configure call barring, click Modify.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 584/803

3. set Password call limit to Yes, and click OK.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 585/803

Add the password-based call barring attribute to a prefix.

Configuration:

1. Choose Trunk > Prefix Configuration.

2. Choose the prefix for which you want to configure call barring, click Modify.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 586/803

3. set Password call limit to Yes, and click OK. For example, to restrict the

international toll call permission, set Password call limit to Yes for prefix 900.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 587/803

In the upper right corner of the web page, click “Save Data” to save the configuration.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 588/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 589/803

1. F;

2. F;

3. F;

4. BD

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 590/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 591/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 592/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 593/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 594/803

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 595/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 596/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 597/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 598/803

Note:

CDRServer doesn’t need the license to support. 

CDRServer doesn’t support Linux system. 

CDRServer doesn’t need to install database, it just store the CDR file on the local

disk.

Functions of devices in a CDR system:

Unified gateway: Generates CDRs for all users connected to it and saves the CDRs to its

CDR pool. The unified gateway periodically pushes CDRs to the CDRServer in an

unsolicited manner or upon receiving the CDRServer's request.

CDRServer: Parses the obtained CDRs and stores them as binary files ( .bill) to a specific

location on the CDRServer. The CDRServer can proactively send a request to the unified

gateway for obtaining CDRs after CDR transfer is enabled under CDR Console > Call

record transfer switch of the CDRServer.

BMU: Obtains call records from the CDRServer through an FTPS interface, and writes the

CDRs into the database.

The administrator can manage CDRs on the BMU, such as querying and deleting CDRs.

Enterprise users can query their own CDRs on the BMU self-service platform.

Third-party billing system: Obtains CDR files from the CDRServer through an FTP or FTPS

interface.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 599/803

CDRServer functions

Function Description

Querying CDRs Users can use query CDR files from the CDRServer using any combinations of the

following search criteria: calling number, called number, IP address of the device

where CDRs are generated, and CDR generation time.

Deleting

historical CDRs

Users can delete CDR files from the CDRServer to free up disk space.

Viewing CDR pool

information

Users can view the CDR pool status of eSpace U1911/U1960/U1980/U1981 on the

CDRServer according to the eSpace U1911/U1960/U1980/U1981 IP address.

Controlling CDR tran

sfer

Users can set the CDR transfer status. When new CDRs are generated in

the CDR pool of eSpace U1911/U1960/U1980/U1981, the CDRServer determines

whether to move CDRsfrom the CDR pool to the original CDR folder according to

the CDR transfer status.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 600/803

Functions of devices in a CDR system:

Unified gateway: Generates CDRs for all users connected to it and saves the CDRs toits CDR pool. The unified gateway periodically pushes CDRs to the CDRServer in an

unsolicited manner or upon receiving the CDRServer's request.

CDRServer: Parses the obtained CDRs and stores them as binary files ( .bill) to a

specific location on the CDRServer. The CDRServer can proactively send a request to

the unified gateway for obtaining CDRs after CDR transfer is enabled under CDR

Console > Call record transfer switch of the CDRServer.

BMU: Obtains call records from the CDRServer through an FTPS interface, and writes

the CDRs into the database.The administrator can manage CDRs on the BMU, such

as querying and deleting CDRs. Enterprise users can query their own CDRs on the

BMU self-service platform.

Third-party billing system(product from Yaxun Hongda is recommended) : Obtains

CDR files from the CDRServer through an FTP or FTPS interface.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 601/803

Three services are contained in the CDR Server - Running window.

MML: provides interaction between man and machines and parses interactivecommands between the CDRServer and the Unified Gateway, such as the call record

searching command.

CDR: saves CDRs from the Unified Gateway and provides the call record searching

and call record file processing services.

You can start or stop all services at any time.

Start all services:

Choose System > Start All.

Stop all services:

Choose System > Stop All.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 602/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 603/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 604/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 605/803

The capacity of the CDR pool varies depending on the unified gateway model. For

the U1980 and U1981, a maximum of 480,000 CDRs can be stored; for the U1911 and

U1960, the value is 50,000; for the U1910 and U1930, the value is 30,000.

Network Type Configuration on the Unified Gateway Configuration on the

CDRServer

Single-node network Enable the function of generating CDR files and configure the

CDRServer IP address on the unified gateway at a single node.

Configure IP address of

all unified gateways.

Multi-node

centralized network

Enable the function of generating CDR files and configure the

CDRServer IP address on the unified gateway at each node.

•In normal network conditions, numbers of all branches are

registered with the central node, the central node routes allcalls, and the central node generates CDRs and send them to

the CDRServer. Unified gateways at branch nodes do not

generate CDRs.

•In case of local regeneration, a branch node disconnects from

the central node. The unified gateway at the branch node

generates CDRs and buffers them in their own CDR pool. After

the network recovers, the unified gateway at the branch node

sends the buffered CDRs to the CDRServer.

Configure IP address of

all unified gateways.

Multi-node

distributed network(peer-to-peer)

Enable the function of generating CDR files and configure the

CDRServer IP address on the unified gateway at each node.

Configure IP address of

all unified gateways.

Multi-node

distributed network

( t)

Enable the function of generating CDR files and configure the

CDRServer IP address on the unified gateway at each node

( l di th t t )

Configure IP address of

all unified gateways

( l di th

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 606/803

After the CDR switch is turned on in a version earlier than U1900 V200R003C20, all CDR

files will be exported.

config createbill switch on 

The CDR switch in U1900 V200R003C20 or a later version will be used to control whether

to export CDR files for internal calls. An internal call refers to a call between two numbersregisterd with the same unified gateway.

config createbill switch on exportinterofficebill yes

Here, the default value of exportinterofficebill is yes, indicating that CDR files of

internal calls will be exported; and value no indicates that CDR files of internal calls

will not be exported.

arameter Descripti

on

Value

Range

Default Value How to Set

protocol Transmis

sion

protocol

type.

Two

options are

available: t

cp andtls.

tls TLS is recommended.

The CDRServer supports TLS and TCP connections.

When the CDRServer starts, ports 2021 and 2020

are enabled automatically without independent

configuration.

port Port

number

of the

CDRServe

r.

The value

range is

1024-

65535.

•protocol = TCP:

2020

•protocol = TLS:

2021

It is an optional parameter.

authtype Authenti

cation

type.

Two

options are

available:

NoAuthan

d AuthByP

wd.

AuthByPwd The parameter must be set to AuthByPwd if

authentication is enabled on the CDRServer. The

parameter can be set toNoAuth or AuthByPwd if

authentication is disabled on the CDRServer.

However, AuthByPwd is recommended to ensure

data communication security.

username User

name for

authentic

ation.

The value

is a string

of 1-32

characters.

The same as the

configuration on

the CDRServer.

The value is the same as the configuration on the

CDRServer.

The default user name on the CDRServer is admin.

password Passwordfor

authentic

ation.

The valueis a string

of 1-32

characters.

The same as theconfiguration on

the CDRServer.

The value is the same as the configuration on theCDRServer.

The default password on the CDRServer

is Change_Me.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 607/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 608/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 609/803

1:config createbill switch off  

2:U1960 can support 50,000 CDRs, 50000/500/5=20 days;U1981 can support480,000 CDRs , 480000/500/5=192 days; 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 610/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 611/803

Follow-up operation steps:

Click “OK”.

A message is displayed, prompting you to restart the CDR service for the

configuration to take effect.

Click “OK”. 

Close the CDR Server CDR-Running window.

In the CDR Server window, click “Exit” to exit the CDRServer.

Start the CDRServer to make configuration take effect.

Notice:

You need to add IP addresses of all unified gateways in a single-node, multi-node

centralized, or multi-node distributed (peer-to-peer) network.

You need to add IP addresses of all unified gateways (excluding the convergent

gateway) in a multi-node distributed (convergent) network.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 612/803

When the unified gateway has any call services, the system automatically generates

D:\BillL\CurFile and D:\Bak\CurFile directories on the CDRServer.

The BMU periodically obtains CDR files from the D:\BillL\CurFile directory. The

parameter of how often the BMU obtains CDR files from that directory is configured

on the BMU.

The D:\Bak\CurFile directory stores backup CDR files.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 613/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 614/803

If No CDR File in the Directory for Storing CDR Files, the possible causes are as follows:

The unified gateway is incorrectly configured.

The CDRServer is incorrectly configured.

Parameters for importing CDRs are incorrectly configured.

The BMU takes the CDR files.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 615/803

Parameters for querying call record

Parameter Description

Caller number Number of a calling party in a call event.

Callee number Number of a called party in a call event.

Unified Gateway

IP address

IP address of a Unified Gateway host. The CDRServer can accept call record files

generated by multiple Unified Gateway hosts at the same time. To query the call record

files that are uploaded to the CDRServer by a Unified Gateway host, specify the IP

address of the Unified Gateway host.

Received time Date on which call record are transferred to the CDRServer from the Unified Gateway call

record pool.

Created time Time when call record are generated in the Unified Gateway call record pool.

Affixal condition Start Position: indicates that the query starts from the call record with the specified serial

number. Max Records Num: indicates the maximum number of call record that meet

query criteria to be displayed in the query result.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 616/803

The call record details are the same as those displayed in the query result window. You

can perform this step to view call record details clearly, without the need to view them by

dragging the horizontal scroll bar in the query result window.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 617/803

1. No. If the CDRServer are connected to third-party billing system or BMU, we can search

the CDRs on the BMU web page or third-party system web page.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 618/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 619/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 620/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 621/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 622/803

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 623/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 624/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 625/803

UPF, upgrade policy file. A UPF file defines the scope of the IP phones to upgrade and the

upgrade policies. Before an upgrade, an IP phone obtains the UPF file from the

preconfigured upgrade file server(HTTP server).

The global UPF file on the HTTP server is used to configure and upgrade IP phones in

batches.

During DHCP server configuration, a 246 parameter is defined for setting the URL of the

global UPF file. After this parameter is set, the DHCP server sends the URL to the IP phone

that applies for an IP address. The IP phone then downloads the UPF file from this URL.

The UPF file contains the IP addresses of the servers where the firmware version file,

configuration file, ring tone files, and local address book files are stored.

The batch configuration and upgrade of IP phones have the following features:

 IP phones of the same model use the same UPF file.

For example, you only need to prepare one UPF file for all eSpace 7850

phones.

IP phones obtain the required firmware version file URL from the UPF file.

After obtaining the global UPF file, IP phones download the firmware version

file based on the URL in the UPF file for batch upgrade.

IP phones obtain URLs from the UPF file to download configuration file, ring tone

files local address book files and other files

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 626/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 627/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 628/803

How to configure the DHCP and HTTP server, please refer to

eSpace_7910&7950_IP_Phone_V200R003_Administrator_Guide(pdf) document.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 629/803

After being connected to the DHCP server and powered on, eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950

sends a request to the DHCP server for an IP address. In response, the DHCP server returns

an IP address, together with the URL of the UPF file (containing the addresses of the

configuration file and the file server) carried in the Option 246 parameter. eSpace

7910/eSpace 7950 then obtains the configuration file from the file server to update its

configuration. If the UPF file also specifies other files (for example, firmware version file) to

update, eSpace eSpace 7910/eSpace 7950 also obtains these files for configuration

update.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 630/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 631/803

1. A。 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 632/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 633/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 634/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 635/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 636/803

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 637/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 638/803

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 639/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 640/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 641/803

The default TR-069 parameter in IP Phone is set to ucems.huawei.com. If a DNS serverhas been deployed, add domain name ucems.huawei.com to the DNS server and map it to

the eSight’s IP address.

IP Phone is able to resolve the value of acs.address carried in the DHCP Option 246 field

to obtain the eSight IP address.

If the DHCP server installed on the Windows Server 2008 is used, set String

value for the Option 246 field to acs.address=http:// eSight’s IP:Port

number  /tr069/services/acs, for example,

acs.address=http://192.169.1.37:8089/tr069/services/acs. For details about the

setting, see "Setting the Option246 Parameter" in the IP phone administrator guide.

If the DHCP server installed on the Windows Server 2008 is used, and set String

value for the Option 246 field to acs.address=http:// Customized domain name:Port

number  /tr069/services/acs, for example,

acs.address=http://ucems.xxx.com:8089/tr069/services/acs. Then we need

DNS server to resolve the domain name to eSight server’s ip address.

We can also setting TR-069 Parameters on the Web Page of an IP Phone.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 642/803

Setting IP Phone Protocol Parameters

Set TR-069 parameters on IP phones so that the IP phones can properly connect to

the eSight. If the eSpace 7900 series IP phones (eSpace 7910, eSpace 7950) with

the version V100R001C02 or later or eSpace 8950 IP phones are used onsite, you

can use the access scan function to connect them to the eSight without settings

TR-069 parameters.

Added by Creating groups:

Before connecting IP phones to the eSight and using the configuration and

management functions provided by the eSight, create groups for IP phones. If TR-

069 parameters are correctly set on an IP phone, the eSight can automatically add

the IP phone to the corresponding IP phone group.

Added in batches:

The eSight allows you to import IP phone devices in batches. Enter device

information in the Excel template provided by the eSight and import information in

the Excel template to the eSight. Then the eSight will automatically add the devices

specified in the Excel template to the corresponding subnets.

Added by access Scan:

The access scan function applies to eSpace 7910 IP phones and eSpace 7950 IP

phones with the version V100R001C02 or later, and eSpace 8950 IP phones with all

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 643/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 644/803

Prerequisites:

TR-069 parameters have been set on IP Phone devices.

The eSight allows you to import IP phone devices in batches. Enter device information in

the Excel template provided by the eSight and import information in the Excel template to

the eSight. Then the eSight will automatically add the devices specified in the Excel

template to the corresponding subnets.

Procedure:

1. Choose Business > Collaboration > IPPhone Management from the mainmenu.

2. In the navigation tree, choose Device Resource Management > IPPhone

Resource Management.

3. Click Import. In the Import area, download the template to your local computer.

4. Enter the IP Phone information in the template and save the template. For details

about how to fill in the template, see the Instructions sheet in the template.

5. Click next to Upload file and select the Excel template.

6. Click to upload the template

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 645/803

You can create lower-level groups in an IP phone group. To ensure managementperformance, do not create groups of more than 10 levels and control the number of

devices in a group within 500.

he following describes the three types of IP phone groups:

Default group: An IP phone that is added to the eSight is added to the default group

by default if the eSight does not have any IP address group or the IP address of the

IP phone is not included in the management scope of the created IP address group.

After an IP address group is created, the IP phone is automatically grouped to the

corresponding IP address group.

Custom group: Users can create custom groups to manage IP phones that they want

to pay special attention to.

IP address group: Users can create IP address groups to manage IP phones by their

IP addresses.

If the IP address of an IP phone belongs to the IP address segments of multiple groups,

the eSight adds the IP phone to the group with the smallest IP address segment that

covers the IP phone's IP address.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 646/803

Once the IP address of an IP phone changes, the eSight automatically moves the IP phone

to the matching group.

Procedure: 

1. Choose Business > Collaboration > IPPhone Management from the main menu.2. In the navigation tree, choose Device Resource Management  > Group

Management.

3. Click Create.

4. Configure the basic information about the group and its manageable IP address

segments.

5. Click OK.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 647/803

When a great number of eSpace 7910 IP phones and eSpace 7950 IP phones with theversion V100R001C02 or later, and eSpace 8950 IP phones with all versions connect to

the eSight, the eSight uses the access scan function to send auto-configuration server

(ACS) addresses and certificate paths to the IP phones. After IP phones automatically

update their configurations based on the information received from the eSight, the IP

phones automatically connect to corresponding IP phone groups.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 648/803

When a great number of eSpace 7910 IP phones and eSpace 7950 IP phones with theversion V100R001C02 or later, and eSpace 8950 IP phones with all versions connect to the

eSight, the eSight uses the access scan function to send auto-configuration server (ACS)

addresses and certificate paths to the IP phones. After IP phones automatically update their

configurations based on the information received from the eSight, the IP phones

automatically connect to corresponding IP phone subnets.

Choose Business > Collaboration > IPPhone Management from the main menu.

In the navigation tree on the left, choose Device Resource Management  > IPPhone

Resource Management and click Access Scan.

Configure CPE user name and password.

Click next to the Operation.The Edit information of scan config page is displayed.

Modify CPE User Name  and CPE Password  based on IP Phone device,

click Confirm.

The default value of CPE User Name and CPE Password are huawei and huawei123.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 649/803

To view scan result details about a record, click in the record. The scan result detailsinclude the start time, end time, time spent, total number of devices scanned, total

number of IP phones detected, and number of devices failed to be scanned.

To search for required scan records, select a search type from the Search Type  drop-

down list box and enter appropriate search criteria.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 650/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 651/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 652/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 653/803

Prerequisites:The configuration file template for the IP phones whose configurations you

want to modify is available. An IP phone model corresponds to a configuration filetemplate.

The configuration file template for eSpace 7800 series IP phones is in .cfg format.

The configuration file template for 8850 IP phones is in .xml format.

For eSpace 6800 series IP phones, eSpace 7900 series IP phones and eSpace 8950 IP

Phone, compress the configuration file (Config-eSpace68XX.xml , Config-

eSpace79XX.xml , or Config-eSpace8950.xml) and the eSightUI.xml  file

provided by the eSight together to a .zip  package. This .zip  package is the

configuration file template for eSpace 6800 series IP phones, eSpace 7900 series IPphones and eSpace 8950 IP Phone.

If you need to add a configuration file template for the IP phones to upgrade, perform the

following steps:

Choose Business > Collaboration > IPPhone Management from the main menu.

In the navigation tree on the left, choose Deployment

Management  > Configuration File Management  and click Configuration File

Template Manager.

Click Upload.

On the Upload Configuration File Template  page that is displayed, set the

configuration file template parameters

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 654/803

In the navigation tree on the left, choose Deployment Management > ConfigurationFile Management.

Click Create and set related parameters in the Basic Information area. For 7900 series

and 8900 series IP phones:

Enter the configuration file name in Configuration file name.

Select the models of IP phones to be configured from Device model. Set

parameters of selected IP phone models in the corresponding panes.For the

description about IP phone parameters, see the corresponding Configuration File

Parameter Description.

For 7900 series and 8900 series IP phones:

When Configuring Policy  is set to Full, all parameters are valid in the

configuration file that is generated, and all the parameter values are delivered

to the IP phones of the matching models.

When Configuring Policy is set to Specified item, only selected parameters

are valid in the configuration file that is generated, and the selected parameter

values are delivered to the IP phones of the matching models. The parameters

that are not selected remain unchanged.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 655/803

NOTICE:

For 7900 series and 8900 series IP phones, set Configuring Policy  to Full  if the

automatic number allocation function needs to be enabled. Otherwise, automatic

number allocation is unavailable during automatic deployment.

After confirming the configurations, click OK.If you can find the new configuration file on

the Configuration File Management page, the operation is successful.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 656/803

Set the value of ACS address to the eSight IP address or the DNS domain according to thesite requirements.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 657/803

Version file management allows you to upgrade IP phone version files in batches.

Choose Business > Collaboration > IPPhone Management from the main menu.In the

navigation tree on the left, choose Deployment Management  >  Version File

Management.

Click Upload and set version file parameters in the Version Attribute dialog box.

Select the required version file.

eSpace 6800 series: Select a version file in .zip format. The version file is the main

program.

eSpace 7800 series: Select a version file in .rom format. The version file is the main

program.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 658/803

Version file management allows you to upgrade IP phone version files in batches.

Choose Business > Collaboration > IPPhone Management from the main menu.In the

navigation tree on the left, choose Deployment Management  >  Version File

Management.

Click Upload and set version file parameters in the Version Attribute dialog box.

Select the required version file.

eSpace 6800 series: Select a version file in .zip format. The version file is the main

program.

eSpace 7800 series: Select a version file in .rom format. The version file is the main

program.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 659/803

eSpace 7900 series: Select a version file in .zip format. The version file contains the

main program, language package, signal tone, certificate file, configuration file,

wallpaper, and ringtone.

Extract files from the software package. The .binfile that is obtained is the

main program.

Make a language package file, compress it into a.tar  file, and rename

it language.tar.

Obtain a signal tone file in .wav  format, compress it into a .tar  file, and

rename itsignal.tar.

Obtain certificate files in .pem format.

Obtain wallpaper files in .jpg, .bmp, or .pngformat.

Obtain ringtone files in .wav format.

You can select the required packages to compress them into a .zip package

and upload the .zip package to the eSight.

eSpace 8850: Select a version file in .bin  format. The version file is the main

program.

eSpace 8900 series: Select a version file in .zip format. The version file is the main

program.

Click OK.The eSight uploads the version file to the file server. You can view the new

version file on the Version File Management page.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 660/803

The automatic number allocation function is available only for eSpace 7900 and 8900series IP phones of V200R003C00 or later.

You can bind a number to the SN or MAC address of an IP phone. Then eSight can

allocate the number to the IP phone based on the bound SN or MAC address during

automatic number allocation. The numbers and identifiers are in one-to-one

mappings.

If the numbers and identifiers are not bound, eSight allocates a random number

within the number segment to an IP phone.

Choose Business > Collaboration > IPPhone Management from the main menu.

In the navigation tree on the left, click IPPhone Management Configuration.

Under Support Number Allocation, set IP phone number allocation parameters.

If Allocate numbers by eSight is set to ON, eSight actively allocates numbers to IP

phones based on the defined IP phone number allocation policy.If  Allocate

numbers by eSight  is set to OFF, the IP phone number allocation function is

disabled.

Set the IP phone identifier to Serial Number or MAC Address based on the site

requirements.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 661/803

You do not need to manually configure an SIP password for each phone number.

Choose Resource > Resource Management > Collaboration Resource from the main

menu. In the navigation tree, choose Unified Communications.

In the management object list, choose the device type, and click the device name.

In the navigation tree on the left, choose Manage Service > BIN configuration.

Set BIN channel parameters.

Set BIN channel connection switch to ON.

The default value of Port  is 8000, and the value must be the same as the BIN

channel of an IP PBX.

Set Password to the password of the IP PBX in Config mode.

Set SSL secure connection switch to the same value on the IP PBX.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 662/803

Choose Business > Collaboration > IPPhone Management from the main menu.

In the navigation tree on the left, choose Business Resource Management > Number

Resource Management.

Click . Open the downloaded template file, enter parameters following the

template instructions, and save the settings.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 663/803

Click Import, select the configured template, and click OK.

We can use the eSight to manage the number resource.

You can bind a number to the SN or MAC address of an IP phone. Then eSight can

allocate the number to the IP phone based on the bound SN or MAC address during

automatic number allocation. The numbers and identifiers are in one-to-one

mappings.

If the numbers and identifiers are not bound, eSight allocates a random number

within the number segment to an IP phone.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 664/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 665/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 666/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 667/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 668/803

Choose Business > Collaboration > IPPhone Management > from the main menu.Inthe navigation tree on the left, choose Deployment Management  >  Automatic

Deployment.

Click in the Associate Configuration File column of the subnet where the IP phones to

deploy are located, and select the configuration files for the IP phone models to deploy.

For 7900 series and 8900 series IP phones, select the configuration files

whose Configuring Policy is set to Full if the automatic number allocation function

needs to be enabled. Otherwise, automatic number allocation is unavailable during

automatic deployment.

Optional: Click in the Associate Version File column and select the version files of the

IP phone models to deploy.

Click in the Allocated Number Segment column and specify the number segment.

The eSight does not automatically allocate numbers if no number segment is

specified.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 669/803

Choose Business > Collaboration > IPPhone Management  from the main menu. . Inthe navigation tree on the left, choose Deployment Management  > Manual

Deployment and view the execution result of the automatic deployment task. 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 670/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 671/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 672/803

The eSight supports the upgrade of the main programs of eSpace 6805, eSpace 6810,eSpace 7800 series, eSpace 8850, and eSpace 8900 series IP phones, and the upgrade of

the main programs, language packages, certificates, signal tones, wallpapers, and

ringtones of eSpace 7900 series IP phones. eSpace 7800 series IP phones consist of eSpace

7810, eSpace 7820, eSpace 7830, eSpace 7850, and eSpace 7870. eSpace 7900 series IP

phones consist of eSpace 7910 and eSpace 7950. eSpace 8900 series IP phones consist of

eSpace 8950.

The upgrade will result in about a 5-minute service interruption. The communication

between the eSight and the IP phone will also be interrupted for about 5 minutes.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 673/803

Choose Business > Collaboration > IPPhone Management from the main menu.

In the naClick Next, click Add on the Select Device page, and select the IP phone to

be upgraded.vigation tree on the left, choose Deployment Management  > Manual

Deployment.

Click Add Task and set related parameters on the Create Task page.

Enter a task name in Task Name.

Set Select Upgrade Type to IPPhone.

Determine whether to select Scheduled Task based on the site requirements.

Click Next, click Add on the Select Device page, and select the IP phone to be upgraded.

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 674/803

Notice:

If the IP phone that you want to upgrade is unavailable, check whether the version

file for this model of IP phone is uploaded to the file server.

If the IP phone does not belong to any subnet, the IP phone cannot be upgraded.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 675/803

In Select Upgrade Type, select the program type (for example, Main Firmware) thatyou want to upgrade.

In Select Target Version, select the required version file for the model of IP phones to be

upgraded. Only version files that have been uploaded to the file server are available here.

In the Update Configuration File area, select a configuration file that you have uploaded

to the file server.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 676/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 677/803

Failed to upgrade the software:

Choose Business  > Collaboration  > IPPhone Management  from the main

menu. In the navigation tree, choose Device Resource Management > IPPhone

Resource Management. Check the connection status in the management object

list.If an IP phone is not online, select the IP phone, click Refresh, and check

whether the Connection value of the IP phone can be changed to Online. If the IP

phone is still offline, modify the configurations and ensure that the IP phone is

online. Then re-upgrade the IP phone.

If the device is still offline, maybe the network is abnormal. Run the ping command

on the eSight server which associates with the media gateway when the device

connects to the eSight to check the connection between the device and the eSight.

If the connection is abnormal, connect the device to the eSight correctly.

Check whether the CPE user name and password configured on the IP phone are

the same as the user name and password that are configured on the eSight when

adding the IP phone to the eSight. If they are different, seeSetting IP Phone Protocol

Parameters to correct the settings on the IP phone.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 678/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 679/803

1. ABC

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 680/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 681/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 682/803

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 683/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 684/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 685/803

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 686/803

Routine Maintenance: maintenance operations carried out by the maintenance staff on a

daily or regular basis.

Version Maintenance: version upgrade and rollback

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 687/803

Routine maintenance serves the following purposes:

Discovering alarms generated by the equipment or existing defects of the equipmentin time, and accordingly taking proper measures. This ensures the stability of the

equipment and lowers the rate of failure.

Recognizing abnormal cases that occur during the running of the charging system

and handling it in time. This reduces economic loss due to loss of bills.

Grasping the running statuses of both equipment and network in real time and

identifying the running tendency of both equipment and network. This improves the

efficiency of maintenance staff in handling emergencies.

Carrying out periodic checks, backup, tests and cleaning for identifying the defects

in the equipment such as, natural aging, function failure, and deterioration of

performance; and taking proper measures to eliminate these defects.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 688/803

Checking the Electromagnetic Interference in the Equipment Room. The electromagnetic

criteria is: l Electric field intensity ≤ 130 dB (μV/m) l Magnetic field intensity ≤ 800 A/m.

We need special instrument to check the electromagnetic interference. This is an optional

item. 

Item   Action  Expected Result 

Firepreventioncondition

Check the power cable andconnector of the powermodule.

No hidden danger of fire exists.Firefighting devices are in goodcondition.

Dust-proofcondition

Check the external surfaces ofthe device, the computer, thefloor and the desktop.

Each position is dust-free.

Theft proofcondition

Check the doors, windows,and theft-proof iron net.

All the facilities are in goodcondition.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 689/803

For Running Status of the Boards, choose Show Board.

For the status of Fast Ethernet Port, the FE port is marked with 100BASE-T, For CPU usage, choose Trace > Resource Trace > Resource Trace Start Board in the main

window of the OMU client. Then select Resource Trace > Slot No. > Board to view the CPU

usage of the SC-MCU board in the slot.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 690/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 691/803

  Alarms on LMT can be categorized into:

Critical

Major

Minor

Warning

Uncertain

Cleared

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 692/803

Different indicators: power indicator, running indicator, alarm indicator, signal loss

indicator, remote alarm indicator.

Indicators in different status represent the running status of the device.

Power indicator, On: The power supply is normal, Off: There is no power supply.

Running indicator, Steady on: The board is faulty. Blinking (4 Hz): The board is writing data

into the Flash memory while the system is running. Blinking (2 Hz): The board is writing

data into the Flash memory while the system is started. Blinking (0.5 Hz): The board is

running normally. Off: No power is supplied or the board is faulty.

Alarm indicator, Steady on: An alarm exists. Blinking (0.5 Hz): A major alarm exists.

Blinking (0.25 Hz): A minor alarm exists. Off: No alarm exists.

Signal loss indicator, Steady on: Signals are lost. Off: Signals are normal.

Remote alarm indicator, Steady on: The peer device fails to receive data. Off: The peer

device is running properly.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 693/803

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 694/803

Monthly maintenance refers to the tasks carried out by the maintenance staff every month.

It covers the tasks on shelf, terminal system, and spare parts.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 695/803

The temperature in the warehouse is 0°C–45°C.

The relative humidity in the warehouse is 5%–95%, without condensation.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 696/803

Yearly maintenance refers to the tasks carried out by the maintenance staff every year.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 697/803

 [%U1900(config)]$debug print cli history info place backup

CLI count = 9。 

Time Tick Session Result Command

2009-12-26 11:46:12 3364 0 Success Back board data syn havefinished!

2009-12-26 11:46:52 7302 6 Success enable

2009-12-26 11:46:57 7841 6 Success show s i

2009-12-26 11:47:37 11831 6 Success config s gateway ip 10.77.220.1

2009-12-26 11:48:10 15178 6 Success config sys hostip 10.77.221.17

2009-12-26 11:48:17 15801 6 Fail save

2009-12-26 11:48:30 17170 0 Success TotalBackup is completed for the

first time!

2009-12-26 11:49:31 23111 6 Success save

2009-12-26 11:49:44 24411 6 Success reboot

==== Command executed success ! ====

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 698/803

To back up the data,

Step 1: Use the save command to save the current configuration and service data to theFLASH memory.

Step 2: When the system prompts "Saving flash in the background finished!" (it means

the saving is finished), use the config upload file data command to back up the data

in the FLASH memory to the load directory on the TFTP server.

Step 3: After successful backup, check that the data.bin file is contained in the load

directory on the TFTP server. The data.bin file is the backup file of the database.

Step 4: Rename the data.bin file, back it up for restoring the data when necessary.

To restore the data of the specified time, load the backed-up data file to the host. To

restore the data,

Step 1: Store the data file to be imported in the load directory on the TFTP server. The

data file need to be named data.bin. If not, you need to rename it. Otherwise, you

will fail to import the data.

Step 2: Use the config download file data command to load the data to the FLASH

memory.

Step 3: After running the config download file data command successfully, run the

reboot command to reboot the system so that the restored data takes effect.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 699/803

You can also execute the Back up&Restore operations on U1900 webpage.

Choose System > File Management.

Backing up a data file

Click Download.

Loading a data file

Click Browse, select the data file (data.bin) to load, and click Upload.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 700/803

Ensure that the hostip has been configured as the IP address of TFTP server and the

directory is rightly set.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 701/803

The Local Maintenance Terminal (LMT) is a management system for the U1911 unified

gateway. It provides various functions such as alarm management, configuration

management, signaling tracing, upgrade, log collection, and offline operations.

The LMT connects to the U1911 unified gateway using SSH/Telnet. A maximum of four

U1911 unified gateways can be connected to the LMT

Alarm management

Displays and queries real-time alarms.

Displays and queries historical alarms.

Queries alarms by parameters such as the alarm severity, alarm type, alarm ID, time,and device IP address.

Collects statistics on alarm by level.

Acknowledges and clears alarms.

Synchronizes and filters alarms.

Exports alarms.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 702/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 703/803

Preparation before upgrade

Obtain software packages and reference documents.

Check the required items.

Back up data.

Obtain the license file for the target version. This file must be obtained before site

deployment.

Stop services before the upgrade. This operation is required only when a conference

is being held using the gateway.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 704/803

The basic steps:

Log in to the U1900 using LMT.

Run the save command to save the current data.

Choose Version > Upgrade .

Click Browse... to select the target version.

Select the device to upgrade, and click Upgrade, click OK.

Verify the services on the U1900 gateway.

If the service verification succeeds, the upgrade continues. Load voice.zip file.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 705/803

The basic steps:

Log in to the device using the LMT.

Choose Version > Rollback .

Select the device for the rollback, select a source version from the Select the version

(rollback) drop-down list box, and click Rollback.

The rollback takes about 15 minutes. After the rollback is completed, Rollback

success is displayed in the ExecutionStatus column.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 706/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 707/803

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 708/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 709/803

The operator user can execute all commands except for those for modifying password of

the superior account, modifying MAC address and modifying the registered domain name

of the MG device.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 710/803

If you click Save as carrier setting, you can restore data to the carrier settings as required.

If you click Save as ordinary setting, you cannot restore data to the carrier settings.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 711/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 712/803

Version information collection is the basis of fault location. If the IAD software being used

is not the latest version and the faults in this version are already solved in the upgraded

versions, you can upgrade the software version to solve the fault.

You can collect following information on the same page.

Main Board Version;

Other Board Version;

Network Port;

User Register Status;

Group Register Status;

Vlan Information;

Current Config;

Alarm History.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 713/803

You can collect following information on the same page.

Main Board Version;

Other Board Version;

Network Port;

User Register Status;

Group Register Status;

Vlan Information;

Current Config; Alarm History.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 714/803

The network connection issue may be caused by incorrect device IP address configuration.

For example, the IP address of the IAD is not set in the same network segment as the

upper-level switch, or the MAC address of the IAD conflicts with other devices.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 715/803

NOTE:

When the CPU usage is higher than 85%, the CPU is overloaded and a CPUoverload alarm is reported. You can end several calls to decrease the CPU usage,

and then continue conversation after the CPU usage becomes normal.

When the CPU usage is lower than 75%, the alarm is cleared. 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 716/803

A single IAD upgrade:

Web manually (HTTP/FTP)

Users can log in the Web management system with the IP address of the IAD,

and select the FTP or HTTP upgrade mode on the Web page. Choose System

Tool > Upgrade Version in the navigation bar to enter the version upgrade

page. Upgrade the software as prompted. After the upgrade is complete,

choose System Tool > Restart Device to restart the IAD.

CLI manually (TFTP/FTP)

Users can log in to the IAD for upgrade in Telnet mode or through a serial port

on the maintenance terminal. After the upgrade is complete, restart the IAD.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 717/803

Batches of IADs upgrade

Web automatically (FTP) or CLI automatically (FTP)

Users can log in to the IAD for upgrade in Telnet mode or through a serial port

on the maintenance terminal to enable the automatic upgrade function. After

the automatic upgrade function is started, IADs can periodically detect the

latest IAD software update and then automatically install it. After the upgrade

is complete, the IAD automatically restarts.

Through the eSight

Users can upgrade IADs managed by eSight in batches. For details on how to

upgrade IADs in eSight, see Upgrade the IAD Manually and Automatically

Upgrading the IAD in IAD Management in the eSight Help.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 718/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 719/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 720/803

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 721/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 722/803

Automatic upgrade: Set the upgrade interval for an IP phone. When the upgrade interval

expires, the IP phone automatically checks for new version files on the server and if there is

any new version file, automatically starts its version upgrade.

A UPF file defines the scope of the IP phones to upgrade and the upgrade policies. Before

an upgrade, an IP phone obtains the UPF file from the preconfigured upgrade file server.

Obtain the UPF template, and modify the parameters in the UPF template depending on

your needs.

Prerequisites 

Hardware version number of the IP phone to upgrade.

Address of the HTTP server where the files for the IP phone to upgrade are stored.

Target version number.

UPF template (which is delivered with the version release).

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 723/803

It is recommended that you use the Apache server (a type of HTTP server) as the upgrade

server.

Choose Start > All Programs > Apache HTTP Server 2.2 > Monitor Apache Servers.

In the following ways you can start Apache server: Choose Start and click it; Or choose

Open Apache Monitor, In the Apache Service Monitor window that is displayed, click

Start.

Copy files that IP phones will access to the root folder of the Apache server.

Change the Option246 parameter value of the DHCP server to the configuration file

URL.8.5 Setting the Option246 Parameter document describes how to set the Option246

parameter.

  − The configuration file URL specified by the Option246 parameter has the highest

priority than other specified URLs.

  − It is optional to specify the configuration file name. The IP phone will automatically

search for and download the configuration file mapping its model.

The Option246 parameter value of the DHCP server should be in the form of

“upfprofile.address=http://172.168.30.10/UPF-eSpace7950.xml”.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 724/803

Basic steps:

Enter the UPF file URL and enable automatic upgrade on the IP phone. Specifically,access the phone web page as an administrator, choose  Advanced > Server >

 Version Download Server > Upgrade Server, and enter the UPF file URL on the

page that is displayed.

Enable automatic upgrade. Specifically, on the phone web page, choose Advanced

> Upgrade > Automatic Upgrade. On the page that is displayed, select

Enable for Automatic Upgrade.

Save the upgrade files to the root directory of the upgrade server.

When the message "Upgrade?" is displayed on the phone screen, select Yes.

After the upgrade is complete, the message "Upgrade Success" is displayed on the

phone screen.

Working Principle

After being powered on, a phone obtains the IP address from the DHCP server.

Then the DHCP server delivers the configuration file URL to the phone using the

Option246 parameter.

After receiving the URL, the phone obtains the global configuration file from the

file server to update the phone configurations, and downloads files such as the

firmware version file from the URLs specified in the configuration file.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 725/803

If some phones failed to be configured or upgraded, the possible cause is that too many

phones send configure and upgrade requests to the server at the same time, and the

server cannot handle all those requests. You are advised to restart these phones. The

phone downloads the configuration file and firmware version from the file server during

the restart.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 726/803

Basic steps:

Access the phone web page as an administrator and choose Advanced > Upgrade.

In the Manual Upgrade area, click Browse next to Import Upgrade Package.

Locate the version file to be upgraded on the local PC. Click Upgrade.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 727/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 728/803

1. A;

2. AC;

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 729/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 730/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 731/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 732/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 733/803

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 734/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 735/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 736/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 737/803

Step 1: Collect fault information.

When technical problems occur in the system or device, you need to collect as muchinformation as possible in the following ways: fault complaint, cyclic check of the

device, alarm from the OMU, alarm from the device, and dialing test.

Step 2: Check whether the device is running normally.

The fault of a hardware device causes service congestion, for example, breakdown of

the SMCU board causes global service congestion. Thus, you need to make sure that

the hardware device runs normally before handling any problem. The methods used

for checking hardware devices are as follows:

Make sure that the power supply of the U1900 device runs normally. That is,

check the shelf and boards inside the shelf are powered on.

Through viewing the indicator light or the alarm information on the OMU client,

check whether all the boards are in normal state.

Step 3: Take action to solve the device fault.

If the system fails to work, and you have confirmed that U1900 device is down, you

need to take action to solve the fault immediately according to the predefined

scheme.

Step 4: Take action to solve service fault.

If the system fails to work and you have confirmed the service fault you need to take

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 738/803

Step 5: Make sure that the fault is removed.

After handling the emergent fault, you need to check that the fault has been removed

in the ways such as NMS, dial test and service verification. That is, you need to

check that the device works properly and the service recovers.

Step 6: Collect fault information.

It is necessary to collect the fault information in time. This helps the technical engineers

to analyze and locate the fault, and prevents the fault from recurring. If the fault is a

device fault, the collected information helps the vendor improve on its devices.

For this reason, it is necessary to collect the fault information regardless of whether the

fault has been successfully resolved or not. You can work out a summary report on

the fault. The report contains the following items: the time, nature, symptom and

solution of the fault.

Step 7: Report for help.

If you fail to clear the fault according to the related emergent fault handling process,

ask for technical support from the Customer service center or local office of Huawei

by telephone or fax.

To minimize the time of handling the fault, you must: record your emergency handling

in detail, notify Huawei of the type of the boards to be replaced, and apply for the

necessary spare boards based on the warranty clauses.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 739/803

Checking Power Supply of the Shelf:

Power failure of the shelf causes the failure of the host device.

Any of the following cases indicates that the shelf is powered off:

 The POWER or RUN indicator light on the front panel of the shelf is off.

 The RUN indicator light on the panel of all the boards is off.

 The fans in the fan box stop running.

To remove the fault, do as follows:

Step 1: Make sure that the connector of the power module is connected properlyand the power switch at the back of the shelf is turned on.

Step 2: If the connector of the power module is connected properly and the

power switch at the back of the shelf is turned on, turn off the power switch

and remove the connector of the power module.

Step 3: Replace the power module and the power cable.

Step 4: Connect the connector of the power module properly, and then turn on

the power switch to power on the shelf.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 740/803

Checking Whether the Main Control Board(s) Is Normal:

For U1980, if all the installed SMCUs (one or two in total) are faulty, the host device

breaks down. If the ALM indicator light on the panel of the SMCU flashes, it

indicates that the SMCU is faulty.

To remove the fault of the SMCU, do as follows:

Step 1: Reboot the system.

Step 2: After the SMCU starts up, observe the ALM indicator light on the front

panel. If the ALM indicator light is off, it means that the board is in the normal

state. The ALM indicator light flashes, it means that the board is in the

abnormal state. In this case, proceed to Step 3.

Step 3: Wear the ESD-preventive wrist strap properly.

Step 4: Check whether the fault is resulted by incomplete insertion of the SMCU.

Open the ejector lever to power off the SMCU. Remove the SMCU, and re-

insert it. Observe whether the fault is cleared. If the fault is cleared, proceed to

Step 6.If the fault is not cleared, in the case of two SMCUs, re-insert the other

SMCU by following the same procedure. If the fault is not cleared, proceed to

Step 5.

Step 5: Remove the faulty SMCU, and insert a backup SMCU.

Taking Bill Immediately:

When handling the fault, you can perform critical operations, for example, resetting

boards. To ensure the bill security, transfer the bills from the host to the directory

specified on the bill server before performing the operations. The method is to

choose BillConsole> Control bill transfer on the bill server, and then check the bill

transfer status is Started.

Check Whether Host Device Breakdown Is Caused by Modifying the Configuration Data:

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 741/803

Any of the following cases indicates that the board faults:

The alarm center on the OMU client shows some alarm information on the fault ofthe board.

The RUN indicator light on the board panel is always on or off.

To remove the fault of the board, do as follows:

Step 1: Reset the faulty board.

 Use the reset board slot command or press the Reset button.

Step 2: After the board starts up, observe the RUN indicator light on the front panel.

If the RUN indicator light flashes, it indicates that the board is normal. Proceed

to

Step 3: Wear the ESD-preventive wrist strap properly.

Step 4: Open the ejector lever of the board to power off the board.

Step 5: Remove the faulty board, and re-insert it. Check whether the fault is cleared.

If the fault is not cleared, proceed to Step 6.

Step 6: Remove the faulty board, and then insert a backup board.

Step 7. Otherwise, proceed to Step 3.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 742/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 743/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 744/803

Log in to the U1900 using the LMT.

On the LMT page, choose Host Log > Call Analyse.

Select Online Analyse.

Set up a call. The cal log information is displayed.

Click Analyze Call Log.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 745/803

Click Analyze Call Log.

On the Call Analyse page, click a call record. The call flow chart of the selected call isdisplayed.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 746/803

The priority for rectifying faults depends on the alarm severity.

Critical: global alarms that severely affect device operations. For example, a powersupply fault, critical alarms must be handled immediately; otherwise, the system may

crash.

Major: board or physical circuit alarms that occur in a certain scope. For example,

the fault of physical circuit, major alarms must be handled immediately; otherwise,

the services cannot run normally.

Minor: general faults or event alarms that describe the working status of each board

or physical circuit. You must locate the cause to remove potential problems.

Warning: prompt message. For example, a message indicating that a device hasbeen restored, warning alarms do not affect system performance and services. No

action is required.

The procedure for handling an alarm is as follows:

Find the critical and major alarms among all alarms.

View the cause of each alarm and handle the alarm.

Verify that the alarm is cleared.

If the alarm is cleared, the fault is rectified.

If the fault is not rectified, find out other possible causes.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 747/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 748/803

Use the LMT to view alarm information.

Log in to the LMT and choose  Alarm Management >  Alarm. All alarms of thecurrent device are displayed.

Double-click a required alarm. The detailed alarm information is displayed.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 749/803

Click Alarm Suggestions tab. Clear the alarm as suggested.

When the alarm is cleared, it turns grey.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 750/803

Logs record key events and information that are generated while programs are running. By

viewing and analyzing logs, you can locate and rectify faults.

Online Analysis

Log in to the U1900 using the LMT.

On the LMT, choose Log Management  > Run Log. The run log information is

displayed.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 751/803

Signaling records the process of establishing a call. By analyzing the signaling, you can

find out possible causes of call failure and rectify the fault.

Online Analysis

Log in to the U1900 using the LMT.

On the LMT page, click Trace.

Double-click the signaling to monitor (for example, SIP).

Enter the IP address of the U1900 and click Ok. The signaling information page is

displayed.

Perform signaling tracing.

Click a signaling in the tracing result. The signaling analysis result is displayed.

Use the signaling analysis result to determine the fault cause.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 752/803

Using the ping command to view the status of network connection, delay time and loss

package.

IP bearer network quality

Data service usage

Network Quality One-Way Delay (ms) Packet Loss Rate Jitter (ms)

Good (recommended) ≤40 ≤0.1% ≤10

Poor ≤100 ≤1% ≤20

Terrible ≤400 ≤5% ≤60

Service Type Good Poor Terrible

Fax Transparent

transmission

(G.711a/u)

Available Unavailable Unavailable

T.38 Available Available Unavailable

Modem Transparent

transmission

(G.711a/u)

Available Unavailable Unavailable

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 753/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 754/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 755/803

Run the following commands to check the MTU status:

show board slot <2-9>

show device status

If the MTU board is faulty, restart it.

If the fault persists after the board restarts, replace the board.

The fault is rectified.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 756/803

Run the ping  command to verify connectivity between an IP phone and the eSpace

U1900.

Decoding

The fault may be caused by conflict between the codec type of different IP terminals

and that of the eSpace U1900. To rectify the fault, set the highest codec type for all

IP terminals and the eSpace U1900. If all terminals support G.711A, you are advised

to set the highest codec type on all terminals to support G.711A.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 757/803

No corresponding prefix is configured on the eSpace U1900. Therefore, you must run a

command to add a prefix for the called number.

Verify that the called number is correct.

[%U1900(config)]#show subscriber

[%U1900(config)]#config add prefix

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 758/803

Possible cause

The IP phone is faulty.

The network is disconnected.

A service restriction is configured on the IP PBX.

Dial *125# on the IP phone. If no announcement is played, the IP phone is not registeredwith the IP PBX. Verify the network connection, account settings, and that the IP phoneruns properly. If an announcement is played, the IP phone is registered with the IP PBX.Check whether outgoing call rights are configured for the user.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 759/803

Possible cause

The echo cancellation function is disabled on the IAD.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 760/803

Possible cause

The bill pool is full and no bill is deleted. Suggestion: If no Huawei or third-party bill server is deployed to retrieve bills onsite,

disable the bill generating function when deploying the unified gateway to avoid service

interruption due to the full bill pool.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 761/803

Possible cause

The long number and short number of the called party are the same. As a result, thesystem processes the number dialed by the calling party as the long number.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 762/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 763/803

Check PRA link status.

Check status of PRA trunk circuits.

Confirm with engineers and find that an engineer deleted the DTU by running

a command.

The fault is rectified.

[%U1980(config)]#show tkc office no 1

[%U1980(config)]# show pralink

[%U1980(config)]#config cancel isolate card

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 764/803

Check whether the eSpace U1900 is effectively grounded.

Run the command for displaying the system clock source to check whether the clocksource is obtained from the peer office.

Check whether the E1 cable is longer than 100 m.

If the resistance of the peer office is 120 ohms, check whether the connector is

correct and perform the test again after replacing the connector.

Connect the two E1 ports on the eSpace U1900 to form a self-loop and check

whether the board is faulty.

Check whether frame slip occurs on the two E1 ports connected in a self-loop.

Run the following command to configure the local crystal oscillator as the clock source and

then check whether frame slip occurs:

[%U1980(config)]#config system clocksource oscillator

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 765/803

Possible cause

Physical trunk links are faulty. Trunk connection configurations are incorrect or links are disconnected.

Configurations of routing upon failures are incorrect.

Step 4: (Replace xxx with the domain name of the SIP trunk). Check whether theHeartBeat  parameter is set to  YES. If no, run the config modify peercomponentdomainname xxx heartbeat yes heartbeatperiod 5 command to enable the heartbeatfunction.

If the fault persists, contact Huawei technical support.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 766/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 767/803

Possible cause

The international toll call right is not enabled for the account.

The called number does not exist.

By default, the international toll call right is disabled for users on the IP PBX to prevent

users from making international toll calls.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 768/803

Possible cause

The DND service is enabled.

The CFU service is enabled.

DND: do not disturb

CFU: call forwarding unconditional

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 769/803

Possible cause

The conference is scheduled as an encrypted conference, but the SRTP flag is set toOFF on the IP phone so that it does not support encryption. As a result, the user

fails to join the conference.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 770/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 771/803

Possible cause

By default, an instant conference supports a maximum of three participants. Whenthe moderator adds four or more participants, an announcement is played,

indicating that the number of participants reaches the maximum.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 772/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 773/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 774/803

Possible cause

The network is disconnected.

Registration information is incorrect.

The IP PBX is faulty.

Most registration failures are caused by network disconnection.

For details about how to rectify network disconnection faults, see Other Fault

 Analysis (2).

Some users fail to register with the IP PBX because the user name, password, or SIP server

IP address is incorrectly set.

You can log in the SIP server to query registration information such as the user name

and password.

In addition, the SIP server IP address may be incorrectly entered during the batch

configuration of IP phones.

Log in to an IP phone as the administrator and enter the correct SIP server IP

address on the Advanced > Server page.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 775/803

Possible cause

The network connection is abnormal.

The network cable is connected to the PC port instead of the LAN port.

Network configurations are incorrect.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 776/803

Possible cause

By default, the interval for refreshing the registered SIP server is set to 3600s on anIP phone, which is too long.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 777/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 778/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 779/803

1. AB;

2. D.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 780/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 781/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 782/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 783/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 784/803

Number

3WC: Three-Way Calling

A

AC: Alternative Current

AAC-LD: Advanced Audio Coding with Low Delay

ACD: Automatic Call Distributor

AG: Access Gateway

AN: Access Network

Apps: Applications

AR: Access Router

ARP: Address Resolution Protocol

A-SBC: Access Session Border Controller

B

B2BUA: Back-to-Back User Agent

BEST: Branch Exchange for Survivable Telephony

BHCA: Busy Hour Call Attempts

BHCC: Busy Hour Completed Call

BLF: Busy Lamp Field

BMU: Business Management Unit

BRA: Basic Rate Access

BS: Billing System

BTU: BRI Trunk Unit BRI

BRI:Basic Rate Interface

BYOD: Bring Your Own Device

C

CAC:Call Admission Control

CAS: Channel Associated Signaling

CC: Conference Call

CDMA: Code Division Multiple Access

CDR: Call Details Records

Appendix I. Glossary

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 785/803

CFB: Call Forwarding Busy

CFNR: Call Forwarding No Reply

CFO: Call Forwarding Offline

CFU: Call Forwarding Unconditional

CTVMNR: Call Transfer to Voice Mailbox on No Reply

CTVMU: Call Transfer to Voice Mailbox Unconditional

CTVMB: Call Transfer to Voice Message on Busy

CH: Call Hold

CLI: Command Line Interface

CLIP: Calling Line Identification Presentation

CLIR: Calling Line Identification Restriction

CLIRO: Calling Line Identification Restriction Override

CNIP: Calling Name Identification Presentation

CNIR: Calling/Connected Name Identification Restriction

CODEC: Code And Decode

COLP: Connected Line Identification Presentation

CONP: Connected Name Identification Presentation

CRC: Cyclic Redundancy Check

CT: Call Transfer

D

DC: Direct Current

DID: Direct-Inward-Dialing

DDI: Direct-Dialing-In

DMZ: Demilitarized Zone

DND: Do-Not-Disturb

DSP: Digital Signal Processor

DSS1: Digital Subscriber Signaling No.1

DTMF: Dual Tone Multiple Frequency

E

ECS: Enterprise Communication Suite

Appendix I. Glossary

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 786/803

EMC: Electromagnetic Compatibility

EMS: Element Management System

ESD: ElectroStatic Discharge

F

FXS: Foreign eXchange Station

FXO: Foreign eXchange Office

G

GUI: Graphical User Interface

H

HME: Huawei Media Engine

I

IAD: Integrated Access Device

IPCC: IP Contact Center

IPT: IP Telephony

ISDN: Integrated Services Digital Network

IVR: Interactive Voice Response

L

LAN: Local Area Network

LDAP: Lightweight Directory Access Protocol

LE: Local Exchange

LMT: Local Maintenance Terminal

M

MAA: Mobile Access Agent

MAS: Mobile Agent Server

Meeting MS: Meeting Media Server

MGC: Media Gateway Controller

MGW/MG: Media Gateway

MoH: Music on Hold

MRS: Media Resource Serve

Appendix I. Glossary

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 787/803

N

NGN: Next Generation Network

O

OMU: Operation Maintenance Unit

ONLY: One Number Link You P

PBX: Private Branch Exchange

PCM: Pulse Code Modulation

PGND: Protection Ground

POTS: Plain Old Telephone Service

PRA: Primary Rate Adaptation

PRI: Primary Rate Interface

PSTN: Public Switched Telephone Network

Q

QoS: Quality of Service

R

RBT: Ring Back Tone

RTCP: Real-time Transport Control Protocol

RTP: Real-time Transport Protocol

RX: Receive

S

SCE: Service Creation Environment

SDP: Session Description Protocol

SG: Signaling Gateway

SNMP: Simple Network Management Protocol

SNTP: Simple Network Time Protocol

SIP: Session Initiation Protocol

SMTP: Simple Mail Transfer Protocol

SRU: Service Router Unit

SS: Supplementary Service

Appendix I. Glossary

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 788/803

T

TCO:Total Cost Of Ownership

TDM: Time Division Multiplex

TFTP: Trivial File Transfer Protocol

TMG: Trunk Media Gateway

TX: Transmit

U

UA: User Agent

UAC:User Agent Client

UAS:

User Agent Server

UC: Unified Communications UCE: eSpace UC Express

UM: Unified Media

UMS: Unified Message System

USM: Unified Session Manager

USB: Universal Serial Bus

V

VLAN: Virtual Local Area Network

VMS: Voice Mail Service

VoIP: Voice over IP

VRP: Versatile Routing Platform

VU: Virtual User

W

WAN: Wide Area Network

Appendix I. Glossary

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 789/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 790/803

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 791/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 792/803

Key parameter: 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 793/803

Run Date: 

Deadline of the license. After this date, license will return to default status.

Default license setup supports X number of users. If you need a support for more

users number (let’s  say N), then you should apply for a proper new license to

support such number. At the time the new license expires, only default license users

are supported after new license expiration. For example, assuming that you have

created X+N users before running U1900 system and you have a valid license to

support X+N users, after the license expires, the system only support X users. Note

that all the services are blocked until you delete the excess users or renew the

license

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 794/803

License Current Config Information: show the capability that the license supports .

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 795/803

Local Survival Right: This control item is for a local node. The value 0 indicates that this

item is controlled by a license, and the value 1 indicates that this item is not controlled by

a license. When this item is not controlled by a license, the following controls are

implemented:

"User port license" item is set to the maximum numbers supported in the system,

the others items keep the number supported by the license.

User data can be synchronized only through the central node. User data cannot be

configured using the CLI or network management system. Other data, such as trunk

configuration, can be configured using the CLI or network management system.

Information about the central node must be configured on the local node, and the

local node also needs to have heartbeat communication with the central node. If the

accumulative days of losing heartbeat communication with the central node exceed

30 days, the license becomes invalid. The license takes effect again after the local

node reconnects to the central node.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 796/803

Redundancy Backup Right : This control item is for a standby node. The value 0 indicates

that this item is controlled by a license, and the value 1 indicates that this item is not

controlled by a license. When this item is not controlled by a license, the following controls

are implemented:

"Local regeneration license" item keeps the number supported by the license, the

others items(except "Open interface platform license" item) are set to the maximum

numbers supported in the system.

User data can be synchronized only through the active node. User data cannot be

configured using the CLI or network management system. Other data, such as trunk

configuration, can be configured using the CLI or network management system.

 Information about the active node must be configured on the standby node, and

the standby node also needs to have heartbeat communication with the active

node. If the accumulative days of losing heartbeat communication with the active

node exceed 30 days, the license becomes invalid. The license takes effect again

after the standby node reconnects to the active node.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 797/803

License Use Information: show the license that has been used.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 798/803

User ports are classified into two types: analog user ports and SIP user ports.

Default number of user ports supported by U1900 without a license:

eSpace U1981/U1980/U1960/U1911: 4

eSpace U1910: 50

eSpace U1930: 100

Number of users supported after a license is loaded:

eSpace U1981/U1980/U1960/U1911: Number supported by the license

eSpace U1910: 50 + number supported by the license

eSpace U1930: 100 + number supported by the license

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 799/803

The number of voice conference concurrence user in eSpace U1910 and eSpace U1930 is

open by default , and the maximum number is 12.

eSpace U1980 provides voice conference resources for 60 parties by default. After a

license is loaded, the total number equals 60 plus the number supported by the license.

eSpace U1960 provides voice conference resources for 30 parties by default. After a

license is loaded, the total number equals 30 plus the number supported by the license.

eSpace U1911 provides voice conference resources for 16 parties by default. After a

license is loaded, the total number equals 16 plus the number supported by the license.

eSpace U1981 provides voice conference resources for 60 parties by default. After a

license is loaded, the total number equals 60 plus the number supported by the license.

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 800/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 801/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 802/803

 

8/19/2019 Hcna Uc Ihuca v2.8 Material

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hcna-uc-ihuca-v28-material 803/803